Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

                                                                  Life as a Nukenin

            Kakashi wakes up with a pounding head, low chakra and shock running through his system.

He's supposed to be dead. He'd felt the killing blow. He'd seen the wide eyes of his precious students as the jutsu had torn through him. He's supposed to be dead.

So why is he sitting in the formerly destroyed lands of River Country, with a headache, and what looks to be a dead group of ROOT hunter nin not five feet away?

…

When Kakashi finally gets up the strength to go bath off in a nearby river he freezes when his reflection shows him something else that is wrong.

There is a slash through his head band.

There is a slash through his Konoha headband.

What the hell??!!!

After that Kakashi spends the rest of the day in a panic induced frenzy where he goes through the ROOT bodies, stripping them of all weapons, rations, and anything he deems useful.

It's when he's doing this that he finds a Bingo book.

His own face is on page thirteen.

Chapter Text

                                                            Are you ok?

            Kakashi spends a week just absorbing the fact that he has been thrown into an alternate dimension. An alternate dimension that’s years behind his own in fact.

Then another week finding out what's different about this world verses his previous one.

The answer is…not much. This worlds Kakashi had been a missing nin going on two years, but other than that nothing changed. Kiri is still in civil war, Ame has still cut themselves off from the outside world, and the Uchiha massacre had already happened.

He thinks his new body is maybe 26 years old, versus the almost 40 it had been. So that’s a bonus, sort of.

He looks for any news about his past self in this dimension and finds surprisingly little.

It's only after he summons Pakkun that he gets anywhere really. Apparently, his alternate self had took the term 'going to ground' literally.

Looking around the cave Kakashi can say he's not at all impressed. It looks like all his alternate self did was sit in here and let himself get eaten up by guilt. Not that Kakashi of now can say he did any better in his own time, but he had Gai to constantly drag him out of his funk.

"Boss?" Pakkun called curiously and Kakashi looked down at the friend that had stayed by his side through thick and thin…until the end.

"Hmmm?"

"Are you ok?" the pug asked and Kakashi's first response is to say he's fine…but …but…he's just lost his genin, (or they lost him depending on your view point) he's in a world that is but isn't his, in a body that may not be his. In a time that is years behind his own. He's just fought in a war where Obito was first his enemy, then his friend (then dead). He's stood up to a goddess, and commanded troops of the five great nations. He's been killed and brought back by Pain. He's lost his home twice over now and he's woke up in an alternate universe as a missing nin.

"….I don't think I am Pakkun…I don’t think I have been for a while." He answers into the silence. The pug doesn't say anything just crawls into his lap and cuddles close. Kakashi wraps his arms around his small companion and they both fall into a comfortable silence.

Chapter Text

Kakashi's been traveling through the land of rivers at a slow meandering pace with Pakkun and the pack at his side. Trying to both find peace with this new development and figure out a plan for the future.

Currently he's in some town called ‘Evening Rain’ sitting at an outdoor tea shop. Pakkun is on the bench next to him but the rest of the pack are sprawled out on the ground enjoying the nice weather.

Apparently, his past self never summoned them unless it was at night or in the cave. Which says a lot about the others mental state.

"E--excuse me." A little voice pipes up and Kakashi turns his head to look at a very nervous village girl who’s staring at him with apprehension and hope in her eyes. She can't be older than twelve, with short brown hair and bright green eyes, it makes Kakashi think of Rin and Sakura. ( He misses them both so very much.)

"Yes?" he asks evenly then watches as the girl visibly gathers her courage once more.

"A-are you a-a tracker?" she asks but her eyes don't rise any higher than his knees, trying to keep all the dogs in her sight.

"Yes." He answers not giving any more information until he knows what the little girl wants. Some of the other villages have started to take notice now and Kakashi is not sure is there worried about him or worried for the little girl, probably both.

Speaking of her…She seems to have an internal debate with herself before taking a deep breath and finally looking Kakashi in the face.

"My little sister went missing. I'll pay you if you can find her." She finally says, green eyes full of determination as she holds out a little purse of coins. Kakashi looks her over again, seeing Rin in her protective stance and Sakura in her stubborn brow, and really how can he say no.

"…do you have any item with her scent on it? And when did she go missing?" he asks and watches as the girls eyes widen in disbelief before she reaches into her backpack and pulls out a doll. Passing it to him over Shiba's head.

"She was out picking berries when the storm came through. That was umm five days ago." He nods at the information as he stands, a low whistle has his pack quickly gathering at his feet. He lets them get a good sniff of the dolls and they all go running off as he strolls out of the village towards the woods, the girl right on his heels.

An hour later Kakashi's pack finds the little sister stuck in a gully. She'd been surviving off of berries and a small creek nearby.

A little chakra walking up the steep sides and the sisters where safe in each other's arms as he walks them back to the village.

Absently Kakashi thinks Rin and Sakura would be proud of him.

Chapter Text

"Shinobi-san?" a voice called as Kakashi sat once more at the tea house with his dogs, this time with the addition of the two sisters (he had no idea why they thought he was kid friendly but the pack liked them so he let them stay.)

"Yes?" he asked the nervous looking young man.

"umm I was wondering if you I could umm hire you to find somebody." the boy said nervously.

"oh? Who?"

"The man who robbed my house last night. Umm I can pay you back with the money he took" The boy looked more nervous even as he said this but Kakashi rose from his seat, whistled his pack into attention then told the boy to lead the way.

Two hours later Kakashi was back at the tea house this time with the girls, the boy, and the boy's siblings all in tow. 

After that a pattern started to develop. A nervous child would ask him for help, usually to find a lost person/ object (one toddler asked him to get his toy off his mom's roof), offer him payment (mostly coins but a few times he got candy) and later join him at his table outside the tea house.

They keep themselves entertained and the pack liked looking after the little pups so he didn’t see the harm. In fact, it looked like the towns people where using him as an unofficial daycare.

When the number of kids got to be in the nearly triple the packs size Kakashi received his first request from someone over sixteen.

"I heard you ninja can use magic and make water." The gruff old man stated as he stared at Kakashi over the gaggle of kids and dogs.

"It's not magic but we can do it."

"Hmmm…"

And that’s how Kakashi started using C-rank jutsu to water the local fields and increased his clientele to the adult population.

Chapter Text

                                                                  Chap 5

"BYE KAKASHI-SAMA!!"

Yelled the little crowd of villagers as he left with the traveling merchant who hired his services. He waved back lazily and pulled the hood of the travel cloak over his head, a nice gift from the village head man after all of Kakashi's help. It was also a good way to keep his identity hidden for a bit.

Traveling with the merchants was slow but Kakashi had nowhere to be and could meander along as much as he liked. At first the merchants of the caravan seemed a little wary of him but a week later he somehow found himself carrying a toddler on his shoulders and surrounded by the eight children that traveled with the group.

How did he get into this mess?

"Kakashi-san?" one of the women called.

"Yes Hanamura-san?"

"One of the horses fell in a ditch we were hoping you could get it out."

"Be right there." He said as he passed the toddler off to one of the older kids.

Seconds later he was using his 'ninja strength' to pull the animal out and onto solid ground. A few appreciative whistles and complements later and Kakashi was back at the head of the caravan in just enough time to stop a bandit from grabbing one of the younger children.

"Really now Bandit-san that's rather rude to jump out and kidnap children for leverage like that." He chided the man, before using a shunshin to get behind the man and knock him out.

When the other bandits saw Kakashi's Hitai-ate they dropped their weapons and ran.

"That was sooooo cool!" the child (Momiji? Momo? Maybe?) exclaimed, right before his mother came to scoop him up to check for injuries.

The trip continued in a similar pattern until they neared the Konoha-Suna border.

That's when Kakashi ran into a spot of trouble

Chapter Text

Aoba, Genma and Raido are making plans on how to attack the caravan when Kakashi's shadow clone finds them.

Their mission seems to be to kill the head of the caravan so the supplies don’t make it to Suna. They know there is a missing ninja guarding the caravan because of the rumor from the bandits, but they think he's low or high chunin.

Kakashi has a moment of panic where he's not sure if he should let them complete their mission for the sake of Konoha, or stop them for the sake of the caravan.

Ten minutes later he finds himself stalling the three Konoha ninja while the caravan finds cover.

Kakashi doesn't use any high level jutsu and stays within the C-rank range so the collateral damage is minimum.

(After being in a world where there was more barren land then trees the copy-nin has come to appreciate nature a little more)

He ends up tackling Genma into Raido and using the senbon specialist as a shield against Aoba's birds. Twisting out of that was a feat even Kakashi isn't sure how he managed, much less while keeping Genma as his hostage. The fact his cloak stayed on through the whole maneuver is simply shear dumb luck on his part.

A quick swipe and he has Genma's weapon pouch in hand. If he remembers right the ones wrapped in orange are the deadly poisons, the green are hallucinogenic and blue are mild knock out ones.

He tests a blue one on one of Aoba's birds just to be sure, before jumping back into the fray.

Shortly later Aoba and Raido are knocked out with multiple Senbon (must have had a little immunity to the poison) and Genma is standing over them looking like a pincushion with an expression of panic on his face. Probably realizing just how bad they'd underestimated the situation.

"Who the hell are you?" He asks in desperation.

"Maa just a man lost on the road of life." Kakashi answers and Genma does not look happy by that answer but continues with the stalling tactic anyway, probably in hopes that the poison will wear off.

"What do you want?"

"Simply to protect the caravan. I have no intention of harming you." Genma snorts at that, then looks pointedly at the dozens of needles sticking out of his own arm.

"Yeah right."

"Maa it's true. You attacked first and I've only used your own methods against you."

"Those senbon are poisoned and you know it."

"You'd have to have immunity to your own poison to carry it and I used the blue ones anyway Genma-san." The other man stiffens at that, he's not worried about Kakashi calling his name because Aoba already made that mistake. No, what he's worried about is how this mysterious man in a cloak knew what color he used for his mild poison.

"Show yourself!" Genma demands, so Kakashi pulls the hood down.

Chapter Text

The color drained out of Genma's face as he finds himself faced with one of Konoha’s most powerful missing ninja.

The copy-cat ninja has been playing with them. And while Genma had known that before, it was completely different than knowing that his opponent could have used a lighting fist to grab his heart from his chest at any moment in the fight.

"maa Are you done fighting me now Genma-san?" the man asks and has the nerve to eye smile at him like they've simply been having a spar.

"And if I am?" he asks warily. This man is nothing like the smart-ass kid he remembers from his youth, nor is he like the broken man who hid behind an ANBU mask.

"Then we can both go our own ways."

"Raido and Aoba?"

"Are your responsibility."

Genma takes a deep breath, then does something that makes his skin crawl and his hackles rise.

He turns his back on his opponent.

Then he picks up his downed comrades and he runs.

As fast as he can, to get as far as he can, from this messed up mission.

It's nearly an hour later when Aoba and Raido come around, and he's never been happier to hear his friends complain about having a headache.

Now he just has to go home and inform the Hokage that the copy-ninja has finally crawled out of whatever hole he was hiding in. To borrow a term from the Nara, this is going to be "troublesome".

***

Raido had thought he was dead when he finally passed out from the poison during the fight. But he woke up with only a headache and minor wounds. The worst of which came from being tackled with Genma in tow, how the man got out of that while holding the senbon specialist and fending off Aoba's birds Raido would pay to know.

When Raido heard who was under the cloak he tried to dispel a genjutsu because there was no way they survived an encounter with one of Konohas most unstable ninja, one that not even the hunter ninja had been able to find in two years.

Chapter Text

Kakashi left the caravan at the gates of Suna with the gate guards eyeing him warily the entire time. He stood politely still as the children surrounded him with a large group hug and took off the second he collected his pay (plus bonus, apparently the women had pitched together to make him a travel pack).

Then he headed off into the sand dunes.

Or, he would have if the sand didn’t decide to try and catch him.

A look around proved exactly what Kakashi had expected.

Garra stood not 10 feet away, hand outstretched and eyes wide and blood shot. Kakashi mildly wondered when the last time the boy got any sleep was.

A shushin put him next to the tiny child and Kakashi scoops him up and throws him over his shoulder before pouring on the speed.

If he was going to fix the seal he was not going to do it just outside Suna's gates.

Seconds later Kakashi found a familiar looking cave and placed the tiny red head down before speedily pulling out a brush and some ink. Dodging sand while in a cave and trying to make a knock out seal with his bad hand writing was not what he had planned on doing for the day.

Sadly, this still didn’t make it into the top ten most suicidal things he'd ever done.

Later, after he fixes the seal as best he can (and really Chiyo a Storage seal?!) he wakes the young red head.

"Hello Gaara, my names Hatake Kakashi."

"What have you done with mother?"

"Ah, I'm afraid that wasn't your mother Gaara but the One-tails. I'll tell you more about it later but first I'd like to be your friend."

"…No one wants to be my friend. I'm a monster."

"Only because people have made you into one. You don’t have to be like that anymore. I can help…I don’t think you’re a monster."

"Even Yashamaru thought I was a monster."

"..oh Gaara, Yashamaru cared about you very much. He only attacked you because he was ordered to."

"What?" the little red head asked, confusion and loss filling his voice.

So Kakashi filled the day telling him stories he had heard from the little boys' future self.

When the sun began to set the Copy-nin gently picked Gaara up and lead him back home.

"You'll come back right?"

"Of course Gaara-chan. I'll see you soon."

Chapter Text

                It was almost two weeks later when Kakashi decided he should check in on his genin.

Entering Konoha was easy, all he needed was a brown wig and some purple face paint, and Sukea was walking down the streets of Konoha, camera in hand.

He found Sakura first, shopping with her mother as they went down the main street. He took a quick picture and moved on. Adding random shots in so he wouldn’t seem suspicious.

Sasuke was next, walking on a secluded street, a bag of tomatoes in hand. Kakashi followed him for a bit but turned before the Uchiha district came into sight. No need to interfere with his cloud of doom and gloom, at least, not yet.

Naruto,….. Naruto found him.

Sukea had been sitting on a park bench looking threw his photos when the blond came up to him.

"Hey what are doing?"

"Maa looking at my pictures."

"Can I see?"

"Only if I can have a picture of you in exchange. I have to make a living you know. " He said with a smile. He could feel the ANBU guards nearby and made sure to keep a tight leash on his chakra.

"How can you make a living taking pictures?"

"Some people like pictures of the scenery, others like pictures of famous people."

"You think I'm famous?" the blond asks a little confused.

"hmm maybe not yet, but who knows, maybe someday you will be." He answers with a shrug and a smile.

Kakashi's made a mental note to submit pictures to a calendar contest and maybe a few bingo book entrees so he didn’t rouse any suspicion. Shouldn’t be too hard everyone loved pics of the Hokage Monument.

Naruto seems to have gotten over his shock of having a person not hate him at first sight and loudly proclaims,

"Of course, I'll be famous someday, I'M GOING TO BE HOKAGE. BELIEVE IT!"

Sukea smiles again and can't help the fond look that enters his eyes at the happy blond.

"Alright then future hokage stand back a little and pose for me." He instructed and Naruto jumps to comply.

A click of the camera and he has pictures of all three of his genin.

"Let me see. Let me see."

"Maa, here you are future Hokage…your picture. Maybe they'll even use it for your Bingo book page." He joked.

"What's a bingo book?" Naruto askes confused.

Ah, Kakashi had forgotten how lacking Naruto's knowledge had been.

Chapter Text

Chap 10

Kakashi's stays for three more days.

Naruto finds him again on the last one and he takes more pictures of the excited blond and even joins him at the Ramen stand. Teuchi and his daughter willingly pose for a picture with large smiles on their faces.

(Later Sukea will put the picture and a short ad detailing his experience in the local paper. The tiny article will be cut out by Ayame and hung on the wall)

He says goodbye and tells the blonde he'll be back in a few months.

He's stalled at the gate while the chunin look threw his pictures. The only one that’s an issue is a close up of Sasuke eating a tomato.

"I thought it looked cute, I wasn't really planning on selling it." Is his defense. They take that picture but let him keep the rest, this surprisingly includes a few blurry pictures of high level jonin and a few chunin. (He's really surprised they let him keep some of the ones of Naruto, but from their position it looks like he's an outsider and has no knowledge of the nine tails host.)

He doesn't question his good luck, simply smiles, thanks the gate guards, and goes on his way.

If he's left Danzo with a few nasty surprises and freed a couple of Root nin before he left… well it's not like anyone is going to suspect the photographer now is it.

***

It isn't long before he finds himself back near Suna's borders and hunting down Gaara.

This time with his weary pack at his side as he introduces them to the young red head.

The visit is kind of awkward and the dogs don't really like the desert much but Gaara seems delighted by them.

He stays the day and shows Gaara the pictures he's taken. The red head seems fascinated that there can be that much green in the world.

When the sun starts getting low he takes Gaara back to the gate and the guards tense and eye him warily, but no one wants to draw a weapon near the 'unstable' jinchuuriki.

He waves to them merrily and turns to leave when he realizes they’ve seen past his traveling cloak, but someone calls his name from inside the village.

"KAKASHI-SAMA!"

Is proceeded by three civilian children running out the gate. They pass by Gaara, who wearily eyes them but makes no move to attack or even draw on his sand, and straight into Kakashi's legs.

The copy-nin blinks and gently pats the vaguely familiar little ones on their heads. They giggle and then start pestering him with questions.

"Where have you been?"

"Why did you leave?"

"Will you be traveling with us again?"

Luckily Kakashi is rescued from his mini-interrogators by a man coming to the gate and calling the children back. It's only then he recognizes the head of the caravan that Aboa, Genma and Raido had been sent to kill.

"Ah Kakashi-san it is good to see you again."

"Maa you as well Takashi-san, I see Suna has given you a bit of a tan."

The merchant just laughs.

Chapter Text

                                                             Chap 11

"Will you be guarding us again Kakashi-san? I'm certain I can pay you well. " Takashi asked and Kakashi can see the sand-ninja wince. They were probably hoping the caravan would hire one of their teams, and really sand did need help with missions.

"Maa Takashi-san, you didn't hire a Sand-nin?"

"hmm we were thinking about it but well…." He trails off uncertainly and Kakashi takes a chance and peeks his head around one of the twitchy gate guards (who’s eyes go very wide at the close proximity of a missing nin) to see the caravan. They don’t look quite ready to depart yet but Kakashi bets they'll be out by tomorrow.

He also knows that suna nin have a bit of a reputation as being weaker, it doesn't help that their own Daimyo hires leaf nin more often than his own shinobi.

"The caravan looks bigger this time." Kakashi adds lightly.

"hm? Oh yes we joined with another heading to Taki." Probably for protection instead of hiring the sand ninja. Kakashi hadn't realized it was quite this bad for Suna, maybe he can help them out a bit.

"Ah, well I don’t mind working with you again but with a larger group it will be more difficult. However, if you want to hire a man named Baki I'm not opposed to teaming up with him." The guards actually twitch at the name and surprisingly it's not the merchant who asks about the man, but Gaara.

"Baki?" it's said as a question and Kakashi wonders if the little red head already knows about his future teacher.

"Yep, he's at least jonin level and a wind user. He does this neat trick with invisible blades." The gate guards look even twitchier, it's kinda funny but Kakashi knows better than to laugh right then. He can see one of them flipping through a Bingo book in the back ground and has to look away when the guy finds his page. Man, he hasn’t had entertainment this good in a while.

"You know Baki-san?" another guard asks the doubt in his voice clear.

"He's a fierce opponent." Kakashi answers and eye smiles at them just to see them twitch more, the poor guy with the bingo book has gone a very interesting shade of pale. White is not the poor man’s color.

Takashi interrupts before anything else can happen though and totally agrees to look into getting Baki if Kakashi agrees to be there in the morning.

He does and then leaves with a pat to Garra's head and a wave to the twitchy gate guards.

Ah messing with people is so much fun.

Chapter Text

                                                                           Chap 12

Baki had heard the story of how a missing Konoha ninja had told the Caravan to hire him.

He just didn’t believe it until now.

"Maa Baki-san it's good to see you're not late." The copy-nin said like it was an inside joke. The man’s traveling cloak has been pulled back and his scratched head-band is on full display.

Baki takes a second to brace himself and meet the other man's visible eye.

"Good morning Hatake-san, It's good to see you are on time as well." The other man actually laughs a little at that.

It's setting Baki on edge.

The fact that an S-rank missing nin is the one who is basically in charge of this mission is bad.

What's worse is that this could be a trap to get rid of Suna's best wind user.

Unfortunately, Suna can't really afford to turn this mission down and on the slim chance this isn't a trap it may show the caravan leaders that Suna can be relied upon for more escort missions.

"How would you like to perform this mission Hatake-san?" he asks hoping against hope that the crazy idiot who made friends with Suna's psychotic jinchuuriki won't slit his throat in the middle of the night.

********

Three weeks in and Baki still can't get over the fact that the children of the caravan are using an S-rank missing nin as a jungle gym. The copy-nin just strides along like there's not a child attached to each leg and at least three more hanging onto his torso and arms. They only climb on Baki when 'Kakashi-sama' says it's ok, and the man only lets them do it after they've settled camp for the night and the traps are all in place.

The children aren't the only ones fond of the missing-nin either, every night at least two women bring Hatake food and tell him he's 'far too skinny' and ‘needs more meat on those bones’. Most times they give some to Baki too, probably just to be polite (but since he's crap at making field food, he's really grateful.)

At this point Baki's pretty sure he doesn't have to worry about the missing nin killing him until they've delivered the caravan to Taki. But the more he's around the man, the more he questions the guys sanity.

The guy goes around reading women's romance novels for crying out loud.

            ***

Kakashi puts his book over his face and leans against the branch he's chosen as his sleeping place. The book is nowhere near as good as Jiraiya’s Ichi Ichi but it's something. He'd been getting desperate for anything remotely smutty when Rukia jokingly offered one of her romance novels to him. It was worth accepting it just to see the look on Baki's face when he saw him with it later.

Chapter Text

Chap 13

They do fine until they hit the outer edge of Suna's border.

Kakashi sends his pack out on patrol as soon as he sees signs that there might be an ambush ahead but he honestly wasn't expecting a band of missing nin to try jumping them. There are three from rock, two from grass and the last one is from Kumo.

Baki instantly calls up his chakra and has his wind blades at the ready, setting in a defensive stance near the caravan while Kakashi jumps forward to engage the enemy.

He manages to takes out the two probably low chunin level grass ninja almost immediately. But then he’s faced with the Kumo and Rock ninja who set him on the defensive before the Rock nin slip past his guard in a move that has Kakashi admiring their teamwork and cursing it as well.

This leaves Kakashi alone with the Kumo nin.

The Kumo nin who is, of course, a lightning user that holds a chakra conductive blade. Kakashi calls up a chidori and, in a move that surprises both of them, manages to cuts through the lightning blade and it's user in one go.

He turns in time to see Baki taking out one of the rock nin with an unseen wind blade and then the other one with a kuni and puppet string trick, but not before an earth jutsu was used to smash one of the carts, taking the poor horse with it.

When Kakashi sees the last Rock ninja going for the children he sees red.

Then in a move that would make Naruto proud he makes a quick shadow clone in order to get in front of, and behind the man, cutting off his escape right before cutting off his head.

He waits a few seconds to make sure there are no more attacks then turns to the caravan.

"Baki status!" he demands, and the sand ninja answers immediately.

"No wounded that I see but we did lose a horse and a cart full of dry goods."

"Good." Then after a minute. "I knew it was the right idea to have you along." He adds with an eye smile.

The sand ninja gives him a startled look but it smooths over a second later and he starts putting the dead enemies in body scrolls.

"Takashi-san is everyone alright?" he asks the Caravan leader, Baki didn't see anything but it doesn’t hurt to ask.

"Yes we're fine Ari-chan skinned her knee but that’s the worst of it." He replies, motioning to were the young girl is being held by her mother.

"THAT IS NOT THE WORST OF IT!" a voice yells and Kakashi turns to see one of the more annoying merchants make his way over.

"HALF MY MERCHANDISE WAS BLOWN UP THANKS TO YOU!" the man yells red faced at Baki who simply stands where he is with hands curled into fists at his side. Kakashi does a quick body flicker and places himself in front of the angry man who jumps back startled at the sudden presence before him.  

"Maa merchant-san perhaps you should be thankful that it was not you who was blown up." He replies mildly and watches the pale man gulp before rallying himself.

"ARE YOU THREATENING ME?!"

"No merchant-san, merely pointing out that if Baki-san hadn't been here you wouldn't be either." The words were said lightly but Kakashi made sure the man saw murder in his eyes. When the idiot paled further and backed away Kakashi simply smiled at him before pulling out his latest novel and walking to the head of the caravan once more.

"It's about time someone took Ito down a few pegs." He heard another merchant mutter.

Chapter Text

Chap 14

Kakashi leaves the merchants in Taki with a wave and a group hug from the children. He laughs when Baki gets subjected to one too. Then he takes off with hot springs in mind. All this sand makes him miss water.

            ***

Baki returns to Suna in full health and with a new respect for a certain Konoha missing nin. (and a romance novel in his pocket)

The merchants have also made inquiries about future guard missions from Suna.

            ***

Rasa listens to Baki's report as his eyebrows climb steadily higher.

"He treats the civilian children like he treats his ninken but they adore him. Even to the point they used him as a human jungle gym. The adults have no problem with this and even encourage the children. The ladies brought food because, and I quote, 'he's far too skinny and needs more meat on his bones'.

When we were attacked, he proved just how he earned that S-rank. I saw him cut through a lightning charged blade and his opponent in one move. The man moved like his chidori and took out three opponents before I'd even engaged one and then performed an A-rank technic to trap the last one before cutting of his head with a kuni.

Additionally, when one of the merchants became angry with me because his merchandise was destroyed the copy-nin placed himself between the merchant and I. Then began to very calmly let the man know that he could have joined his merchandise."

When Baki admits that the romance novel the missing nin gave him isn't that bad the Kazakage is glad for his face mask.

            ***

When Konoha later make an inquiry about Hatake Kakashi being in Suna territory Rasa sends them a very strongly worded letter letting them know that one of their 'missing-nin' has been more helpful for Suna missions than Konoha itself has in years.

            ***

When the Hokage reads the letter, he puts his pipe down, then calls a council meeting because they are now running the risk of their 'ally' taking the side of a very powerful missing nin.

Chapter Text

Chap 15

Sukea is back in Konoha with his camera in hand and headed to the ramen shop. He submitted a picture of Baki to the admin office and is going to use his little pay check to pay for lunch. (and if he happens to run into a certain blonde while he's there, well…)

Sure enough Naruto's there, but the blonde isn't being his loud usual self and seems to only be picking at his ramen today.

"Why the long face?" he asks a little concerned as he slides in beside the kid.

Blue eyes look up at him, then light up in recognition.

"Sukea!!"

"Hey there Naruto. How have you been?"

"um oh I've been fine." The blond replies but does not meet Sukea's eyes.

"hmmm really?" Kakashi uses the full view of his face to give the blonde a disbelieving look.

"…..I failed the genin test again." The blonde finally grumbles out and Kakashi remembers the report on how many times the kid tried and failed before as well.

"oh? Is this your second time trying?"

"….my sixth." The blonde admits reluctantly.

That means he only has one more left before Mizuki tricks him into stealing the scroll. Hmm Kakashi could let that happen, let the boy overcome the obstacle on his own and realize that Iruka-sensei believed in him.

…or he could change it up a bit.

"What parts are you having trouble with?" he asks mildly and nods as Ayame puts a bowl of eggplant ramen in front of him. He smiles a little at the fact that they remembered his order from last time.

"Everything." Naruto says with a heavy sigh. Kakashi's not used to seeing the boy so down. It tugs at his hearts strings.

"hmmm tell you what. After we eat why don’t me and you go to the training grounds ok."

"Really? But wait you're not a ninja."

“Nope. I'm a photographer but I did attend the academy when I was younger and I take pictures of ninja all the time, so at least I can tell you if your stance is wrong."

"you mean you'll help me?"

"yep"

"Alright! This is gonna be awesome Believe it!"

Chapter Text

Chap 16

Sukea does, in fact, correct a few of Naruto's stances and runs through a few traps. But as a civilian there's not much he can do for the boy, and the next graduation test isn't too far away.

However, that doesn't mean he can't help the boy a little bit in another way.

…Like say, dressing up in a mask and cloak and blowing up a Root base as a distraction while he nabs the forbidden scroll and a conveniently placed Naruto as a hostage.

 If the 'mysterious enemy ninja' just so happens to brag about his 'evil plan' to learn the shadow clone jutsu and multiply himself into an army… well that's just villain monologue 101. Then if he just so happens to be reading the scroll were the 'hostage' can see it, well hubris gets the best of everyone.

The first ones to find them are Mizuki and Iruka (he'd only set the trap for Iruka but having Mizuki there to let the metaphorical fox out of the bag works well too).

Iruka the protector that he is offers himself in Naruto's place and the blonde nearly cries.

Of course then Mizuki has to open his mouth and ruin the moment by announcing what Naruto is and telling the mysterious ninja to "go ahead and kill the little monster".

Naturally this results in the two teachers fighting, at first verbally, then physically.

Kakashi settles down and watches the show.

When Naruto joins in and pulls out his new skill at multiplying, well Kakashi figures his job is now done and disappears into the clone army.

            ***

Later when no one is looking and Mizuki has been sentenced to prison (for letting out an S-rank secret and trying to kill his fellow teacher) Kakashi quietly slits the man's throat. No need to worry about that jail break in the future.

            ***

Hiruzen looks at the blonde sleeping in the hospital chair by the chunnin teacher's side and let’s himself relax a little.

Today has been very stressful.

First there had been that explosion on the north side of the village that caused some major structural damage. That somehow turned out to be a still active ROOT base. (Hiruzen was not looking forward to that talk with Danzo.)

Then some mysterious ninja raids the Hokage tower and disappears with the forbidden scroll and the village jinchuriki in tow.

He had to call in chunnin to help because most of the jonin forces were working on clearing out the ROOT base of information while the none ROOT ANBU contained the ROOT nin. (yeah, Hirusen was very much not looking forward to that talk with Danzo.)

Of course then it turns out that one of the academy teachers that found the mysterious ninja was a traitor and tried to kill the loyal teacher and the jinchiriki. The scroll was damaged in the ensuing fight and to make matters worse the mysterious ninja was never found.

I'm getting to old for this.

Chapter Text

Chap 17

Kakashi stays in Konoha a few more weeks until Naruto takes his last exam and becomes a genin.

He ends up celebrating with the boy and Iruka at the ramen stand afterwards.

But it hurts too much to stay and watch his team 7 be given to someone else, so he leaves that afternoon.

Managing to snap a picture of Konoha's beautiful green beast before he gets to the gate.

The gate guard takes one look at the picture before flinching and looking at Sukea in slight betrayal. Considering the poor guard had been looking through peaceful village shoots before that Sukea thought it might be justified.

He still laughs at the guard's expression. It’s a shame that he still had Sukea's camera or he'd have snapped a picture of the poor guard for himself.

            ***

Kakashi finds himself outside Suna once again. This time Baki has joined Gaara in wondering around the sand dunes.

"Yo." He calls once he gets close enough to be heard without yelling.

"Good afternoon Hatake-san" Baki greets, Gaara right on his heels with his own greeting.

"Hi Kakashi-sensei"

The copy-nin stalls a little at that.

"Sensei?" he questions looking at Baki for more of an explanation.

"You have been teaching him haven't you?" the sand ninja asks, a skeptical eyebrow raised.

"maa I suppose I have but it's only the basic conditioning." He answers and tries to find out how he feels about this.

He can't teach team seven so he wasn't expecting to hear that word addressing him again. But now that he has heard it…well Gaara would make a cute student.

"That's still teaching Hatake-san. And speaking of, I was wondering if I could join you in your training today."

"hmm sure, as long as Gaara doesn't mind." He says, making sure to look at the little red head to emphasize the point and to ask him his opinion.

"I like Baki." Is the verdict and then the three of them race to the designated training ground.

Once there Kakashi starts going through the first stretches with the red head. Surprisingly Baki joins in, going along with the motions as if he and Kakashi are longtime friends doing simple training together.

It's suspicious.

Then it hits Kakashi.

"Maa Baki-san?"

"Yes Hataki-san."

"Was it the Kazekage's idea or yours?"

"Pardon?"

"To try and recruit me to join Suna. Who's idea?"

"I don't know what you’re talking about." The sand nin denies.

"hmmm So Gaara suddenly calling me sensei and you being friendly has nothing to do with the fact that I would make a strong ally if I joined your village?"

Baki is tellingly silent.

"It was a good try but right now I'm not sure I could take orders from your Kazekage. However, I will promise not to take missions or cause trouble for Suna knowingly as long as I can train Gaara whenever I drop in."

"Would you also be willing to exchange information?"

"hmm depends on what kind. If it's about Konoha probably not, but anything I have on Kiri is free game."

"I'll let the Kazekage know."

And they fall into silence, Gaara acting like the exchange didn’t even happen as they finish their work out and Kakashi teaches his cute little student a simple snare trap for small animal prey.

Chapter Text

Chap 18

Kakashi is somewhere along the Taki border when he unexpectedly runs into a small group of four missing nin.

Everyone pulls out weapons and jumps into a defensive positions but no one makes the first move.

Kakashi simply stays on his branch, weapons at the ready until the woman with a scratched Grass headband huffs and drops her stance.

"Copy-nin Kakashi." She addresses him.

"Poison kiss Nana." He returns.

He's seen her in the bingo book recently and he fought her in his alternate past. He recalls her being a fierce opponent but she was more interested in escaping at the time than killing him, so they both survived. He remembers receiving word that grass hunter nin finally got the best of her, but he's not sure how.

"To what do we owe your unexpected visit?" she asks icily her blue eyes not leaving him as she tosses a lock of her green hair over her shoulder.

"I was just passing through, but I'm open for trading a bit of information." He responds lazily, though he hasn’t relaxed his stance at all yet.

Nana looks at her comrades who all give various signals to her unasked question. Ranging from a shrug, to a head shake, to a roll of the eyes.

"We accept your offer. But if you try to kill us know that there will be retaliation."

"Of course." He answers back and relaxes as much as he’s willing too, not all the way but enough to put the others more at ease.  

Then he joins them at the hastily abandoned fire and opens with,

"So what can you tell me about this organization called Akatsuki?"

            ***

A few hours later they've moved on from information exchange to telling the most outrageous situations they have ever found themselves in.

"So I'm sitting there like a nice little prisoner and the guy comes in raging drunk and decides I'm too pretty to be keep all tied up. He offers me a fresh change of clothes and supplies. Well at first I thought it was a trap right? But nope I walked out of there with all his weapons, food and anything I could carry. Including his previous bounty." A purple haired man by the name of Maki finishes his tale and Kakashi chuckles along with everyone else. He ideally wonders what happened to this man in his past dimension, but decides not to dwell on it.

Just as Nana begins a tale of her own something starts tickling Kakashi's senses.

"-and then the targets wife walks in-"

"Maa Nana-san I hate to interrupt but I think where about to have some very uninvited guests." He says over her (totally ignoring how he himself was an uninvited guest at the beginning of their meeting.)

It only took a second for the group to absorb his statement then everyone jumped, in seconds they were poised and ready for battle.

Chapter Text

Chap 19

Everyone is battle ready when a group of three come into the clearing.

"Whoa what's with the hostile reception?" one man askes and everyone relaxes their stance, well, except for Kakashi who still eyes them wearily and hangs back.

"Jeez Tsuna, you guys weren't scheduled to be back for another three days." Nana says, and Kakashi realized this group of missing ninja must actually be larger than he first thought.

"The guy offed himself before we got there." Was the annoyed retort.

"Dang it! That was our only target for months." Maki added, and the others curse under their breath.

"Maa trouble in paradise?" Kakashi asked and all eyes turned in his direction. The three new additions pulled out weapons but at a signal from Nana they put them away, although their weary expressions don’t fade.

“Nothing you need to worry about." Nana answered, her voice just this side of chilling.

"Maa maa I didn’t mean to be rude…But if your last member would come out now it'd put me more at ease." He responded back.

"last member?" the man called Tsuna asked, he looked so confused Kakashi actually double checked the spot that was still setting off his senses.

Yep it was still there. But if they did not have a fourth man on their squad then someone had been following them.

Kakashi would bet money that the same someone killed there target too.

Before anyone else makes a move Kakashi body flickers near the chakra presence and throws a Kuni with an attached paper bomb in their direction. Another body flicker puts him near Nana as the watching ninja fly's out of the bushes. One arm smoking and the other raised with a sword in hand.

Kakashi is happy to note that the small bomb only took out a few branches and not a whole tree. He’s seen enough deforestation to last him a lifetime after all.

Now that the others weare alerted to the intruder's presence Kakashi steps back and lets the other ninja handle it. He really doesn’t want to get in the way of friendly fire.

Not five minutes later the man is dead and Nana’s sending him a grateful look from where she’s being patched up by their medic.

When everyone has been looked over, including a very reluctant Kakashi, Nana announces its time to move camp. They need to get out of there in case the dead man has friends nearby.

"You coming with us Hatake?" Maki asks him and Kakashi is honestly tempted for a bit. He feels the deep longing for a pack again, but ultimately decides against it. There's no telling how this group would react to his exploits to Konoha and Suna, and he’s not taking any chances when it comes to his students. (even if they aren’t His right now)

"Maa not this time Maki-san."

"Suit yourself." The man replies and Kakashi leaves the missing ninja behind with a wave and a smile.

Chapter Text

Chap 20

Kakashi finds himself in the land of rivers and searches out the town of 'Evening Rain'.

He's just outside the town when a woman's voice calls out to him.

"Kakashi-sama, you're back!" she exclaims happily and the next thing Kakashi knows half the town has come forward to say hello.

He and the pack are once again seated outside the tea shop, this time surrounded by the towns people.

He's not sure what to do with the attention at first but then the children ask for a story and it's not hard to do. The more exaggerated the better it seems.

It's not long later when he get's his first request (By a toddler who lost there left shoe.) and the pattern starts all over again.

            ***

He stays for a week this time and moves on, much to the dismay of the townsfolk, but this place is not home. His home is Konoha, and he is no longer welcome there. It's a sobering thought.

Kakashi really wants to check on his genin…who are no longer his genin.

            ***

He goes to see Gaara instead.

The red-head is at the gates when he nears them and this time his siblings are with him and Baki.

"Yo." He calls and all four of them pass the twitchy gate guards and come toward him. Temari and Kankuro hang back behind Baki but Gaara approaches quickly for his customary pat on the head.

"Hi Kakashi-sensei." The little red head greets when it’s done.

"Hello Hatake-san, Gaara wanted to introduce you to his team." Baki opens with when Kakashi raises an eyebrow in his direction.

He looks down at Garra who is looking at him with a neutral expression.

In this dimension or the next Garra will always have one of the best poker faces Kakashi has ever seen.

"This is Temari and Kankuro." The once future kazekage reports dutifully.

"Maa it's nice to meet you both I'm Kakashi Hatake."

"It's a pleasure to meet you Hatake-sama." Tamari executes with a bow and then elbows Kankuro to do the same.

"Will the two of you be joining us in today's training?" he asks though he already knows the answer.

"If it's alright with you and Gaara, Hatake-sama." Temari politely replies and Gaara nods his acceptance before looking up at Kakashi once more.

It looks like Suna is trying to lure him in by giving him a genin team.

And the offer is so tempting.

He could walk back into Suna right now and tell them his condition for joining would be this team and they would give it to him.

He would have a team, a pack again.

….But they wouldn't be his team.

He misses his genin.

Chapter Text

Chap 21

Kakashi finds himself back in Konoha, this time not in the guises of Sukea but one of the ANBU.

It's not too difficult to put a cover over his hair and grab one of the trainee masks. Then he hunts down the guards that are watching Naruto and signs 'orders' 'watch'.

The one in the deer mask signs his acceptance and Kakashi joins them on watch.

He of course had taken a gamble doing things this way but it looks like it's still a common thing for other ANBU to send the rookie to babysitting duty.

 He lets out a breath but doesn’t let down his guard and follows the others as Naruto heads to the training ground. Kakashi makes sure to stumble a little when he hits a tricky hiding spot on the roofs and feels the amusement come off the other ANBU at the 'rookie'.

It's likely that the Anbu guard will be called off of Naruto in a month or two now that he's hit genin but for now Kakashi plans on using the disguise to do a little …spying.

Kakashi stays in his tree and watches as another jonin teaches his students. Watches as a man he barely recalls, gives Sakura a scroll on medicine. Watches as the man sits Naruto down with chakra exercises. Watches as he spars with Sasuke and corrects the young mans movements.

Watches as his team grows without him.

His heart aches.

            ***

When practice ends Sasuke is sweating and brooding, Sakura is reciting medical knowledge and Naruto has frustration coming off him in waves.

Chakra control exercises aren’t the best for him.

Kakashi noticed that the Jonin instructor had mainly focused on Sasuke and left the others to their own devices. Not that he can really judge with how he had originally pitted Sasuke and Naruto against one another and left Sakura mostly to herself.

It could just be that today he focused on Sasuke but tomorrow he'll focus on Sakura or Naruto, one day isn't really enough of a time to pick up on a pattern after all.

Once back at Naruto's apartment the ANBU change shifts and Kakashi sneaks his way out of Konoha.

……Only to come right back in as Sukea an hour later.

With a greeting to the slightly familiar gate guards and an exchange of some gossip he's free to enter.

Camera in hand Sukea sets off to find Naruto.

Chapter Text

Chap 22

Sukea's plan is to let Naruto find him and then help the blonde through his spot of trouble with his chakra control.

Instead he finds Sakura sitting on a park bench with a forlorn look on her face and swiftly changes plans.

It's about time this girl looked at something other than Sasuke.

"Excuse me kunoichi-chan." He calls lightly and the pink head snaps up in his direction.

"Y-yes?"

"I was wondering if I could take your picture? You just look so pretty sitting in the sunlight. It's really a lovely aesthetic look." He said and sure enough Sakura blushed and nodded. A few snaps from different angles, then he sat next to her.

"Would you like to see konoichi-chan?"

"oh umm yes please." She said and Sukea takes the camera off from around his neck to show her the pictures and examine the lighting. One shot stands out form the rest and Sukea paused on it with a humm.

The picture had a three quarter view of Sakura's face, eyes looking away, and headband glinting brighter than her hair in the sunlight. The shading made her childish round face look older and her eyes are nearly hidden in shadows. It reminds him painfully about his Sakura, or well the Sakura this girl could grow into.

"I think this is my favorite one konoichi-chan."

"What? Why?"

"Because it makes you look like a strong ninja." He answers simply and they spend the next few minutes in silence as they look at the remaining pictures.

"Maa Konoichi-chan can I ask you a question?"

"Oh umm sure."

"Why did you decide to become a ninja?"

"Oh well, there's this boy in my academy class that I ..um that I really admire and I wanted to be his wi- I mean I wanted to be like him."

"hmmm…but what made you decide to go to the academy in the first place?"

"huh?"

"Surely you wanted to be a ninja before you went to the academy or you wouldn't have meet this boy."

Sakura sits in silence for a while and Sukea lets her. After all, he already knows the story. His Sakura has already told him about going with a small caravan to visit her Aunt at a young age. When it was attacked by bandits the young konoichi on the guarding mission took a kuni to the leg when it was aimed at Sakura's mom.

Kakashi thinks about how strong his student had become over the years. How she went from dieting fan girl to the second coming of Tsunade.

Then he looks at the girl sitting by his side and smiles.

"Maa Konoichi-chan you seem strong enough to not need a boy like that. I think you’re pretty admirable without him." Sukea leaves her alone after that only making a light inquire about entering a few photos in a competition to which the pinkett agrees to distractedly.

Chapter Text

Chap 23

Sakura is sitting on the training grounds once again going over a medical text scroll that was given to her.

Ever since they became a team that’s all Sakura has been doing, reading about being a medic. At first she thought it was great that her jonin sensei had so much faith in her. He always asks her questions at the end of each session and corrects her if she gets one wrong. But that's all he does, there are no demonstrations, no encouragements, no practice, just reading and questions. It's like the academy all over again, except at the academy Iruka sensei had made her do the minimum workout routine and Ino was there to compete with.

Now she just sits there reading while Naruto tries to learn chakra control and Sensei and Sasuke-kun spar.

Usually Sakura would be watching in admiration but today she has something else on her mind.

Today she's thinking about why she became a ninja… the answer isn't Sasuke, the answer isn't even Ino. In fact both of those came at the academy.

The reason Sakura wanted to become a ninja, was because of a young konoichi who had saved her mom from a kuni.

 She hasn't thought about her in a long time, but now that she's been reminded by that weird photographer, she can't get it out of her head.

The girl probably wasn't higher than genin back then but to Sakura she had looked fierce and brave.

When Sakura looks in the mirror she sees nothing of what that konoichi looked like.

The konoichi had defined muscles that had strained as she had thrown a man twice her size over her shoulder. Sakura has little muscle that is certainly not defined and she can't pick up anything over 150 pounds.

The konoichi had a short hair cut that was held up in two short spike ponytails keep away from her face during the fight. Sakura's hair is long and lose, constantly getting her way while she does simple things, much less try and spar.

The photographer yesterday had told her she looked strong, the picture he had taken made her look strong. When Sakura sees herself, she does not look strong.

But she wants to be.

***

A week later Sakura is in the middle of going through the academy work out when Ino comes stomping up swinging a roll of paper like a weapon.

"WHAT IS THIS!?" the blonde screams enraged while Sakura stares at her in confusion.

"What is what Ino-pig?" she asks taking a defensive stance they learned in school just to be on the safe side.

"THIS!!" Ino yells holding the magazine in front of her face.

It only takes a second for Sakura to recognize the picture. Bewildered, she grabs the magazine and takes a closer look. She had won third place for the 'power of the konoichi' competition. A vague memory of the photographer mentioning it came to mind but she was not expecting this.

This was the person Sakura wanted to be.

No, this was the person she was going to be.

"Ino-pig." She calls, interrupting her friends rant. Sakura folded the magazine and placed it aside before holding her hands up in the customary 'start' position.

"Fight me!" she yells.

Chapter Text

Chap 24

Sukea finds Naruto at the ramen stand loudly complaining about 'stupid chakra control exercises.'

"Is that what you've been up to?" he asks from behind the blond and chuckles in amusement as the boy almost jumps out of his chair in surprise.

"Sukea!" the blond yells and leans off his stool to hug the man around the waist. Now it's his turn to be surprised, it's been a while since he's been hugged by someone he thinks of as pack. He stills for a second but smiles and lightly pats the boy on his head.

"Hello Naruto." He says kindly and looks up as the chef places a bowl of eggplant ramen beside Naruto's second bowl of pork ramen.

"So what's this about chakra control exercises?" he asks as he sits down. The topic sends Naruto on a thirty minute rant. Satsuki just watches as the blond manages to both stuff his face and sound half way legible at the same time.

When his student (not his student, not this time) finally takes a breath Sukea takes a chance to drop a hint.

"Chakra control is easier for people with lower amounts of chakra. Is there a technique or jutsu that you can use to spilt your chakra in half or more?"

"ummm I think so." The blond relied eyes squinting together.

"Then you should use that and then try chakra control exercises, it'll might be easier than what you've been doing." Sukea explained with all the enthusiasm of a civilian who thought they know more about chakra than the average ninja.

He could practically feel the near by ninja rolling their eyes at him.

The conversation carried on for a little while longer then Sukea made his excuses and left the blond alone.

It took the brat another week to figure out that using the Kage bushin before he started the chakra control exercises helped him learn them faster.  

***

Sukea is at the village gates getting his pictures looked through when Naruto bounces up to him in excitement.

"Sukea! Sukea!"

"Not so loud idiot I'm sure the man can hear you." Sakura follows up her reprimand with a punch to the blonde's shoulder.

"Well if it isn't Naruto, and Kunoichi-chan."

"oh umm My name is Sakura Haruno, Sukea-san." The pinkett introduces herself a little shyly.

"Wait do you too know each other?" Naruto questions looking between the two in confusion.

"We do, Haruno-chan was a very good model for the konoichi competition this year." Sukea replies as his only female student (no longer his student, he has to remind himself.) blushes brighter than her hair.

"huh?"

"don’t worry about it too much Naruto. What are the two of you doing near the gate anyway?" he asks instead, and right away Naruto loudly exclaims.

"We have a mission! Believe it!"

"oh?"

"yeah we're taking some stupid scroll to-"

"Idiot don’t give away mission details!" Sakura cuts him off with a hand over his mouth, her face now red from anger and not embarrassment.

Before Sukea can respond however an unfamiliar voice is calling his students (not his, not his, not his) away. He looks up to see their new sensei wave his students over and the two swiftly say good bye before following the jonin and Sasuke out of the gates.

Kakashi's heart starts to hurt as he watches his students leave him behind.

Chapter Text

Chap 25

Kakashi was not stalking his genin. Nope, not stalking….he was just ..umm making sure they were safe that was all. Yeah. Cause umm there was a lot of dangerous stuff in the world like uh ..Zetsu! Zetsu was a dangerous thing. (and he really needed to find that stupid plant already)

So yeah he was not stalking, just making sure his genin didn’t need his help or anything. (He decided to quit trying to lie to himself, they were always his genin and always will be)

He follows the team to drop off the scroll in Takayama, it would normally only take him a day but at genin speed it's closer to three. The client happily receives the scroll and then they turn right around to head back home. All is fine and there's no sign of any trouble, when the jonin suddenly starts leading them off course.

At first Kakashi thinks the man may have finally gotten wind of him but while the man is a jonin, Kakashi is an ANBU Captain, with the skills that come with that title.

Something is wrong.

After half a day of travel and Kakashi summons his pack, giving them the barest explanation and sending them to spread out and watch for trouble.

The jonin sensei (who Kakashi never bothered to learn the name of) stops the kids early and says there going to go ahead and set up camp.

The genin look a little confused but not weary or alarmed.

Kakashi pulls his chakra in tight around him and perches on a branch right above their camp, then settles in to wait.

It's three hour later before anything happens.

The genin have settled down by the fire and are setting up their sleeping bags when Kakashi feels four chakra signatures ping his awareness.

The shinobi near the camp and Kakashi instantly goes on alert. He stays still and watches the genin jump in alarm as Kumo ninja enter the camp.

"Looks like you did it Jiro." Said the first kumo nin and Kakashi recognized him from the bingo book as Daisuke of the hidden blades.

"Hiazaki-sensei? What's going on?" Sakura asks backing up until she is nearly in the fire.

"What's going on little girl is that your sensei is a cloud spy and is more loyal to us than he is to you." One of the other ninja sneered.

This was of course not taken well by Naruto and Sasuke.

"You’re a traitor?" Sasuke all but states as his eyes narrow.

"What? But why?" Naruto looks like he was experiencing Misuki's betrayal all over again.

"Why not." Was the man’s come back, and then begins the villain monologue that Kakashi has become accustom too after having Naruto on his team.

"I never wanted a genin team, kids like you would only hold me back. Did you know that my specialty is ninjutsu? The Konoha council wanted the little Uchiha brat over there to copy all the jutsu I've spent years working for so that he would be stronger weapon for Konoha. They didn’t even care what I had to say about it. I was just going to be the little brats jutsu generator. You and Sakura were just the sacrificial pawns they added in order to push him higher into the ranks. Well I'm not going to be some stupid stepping stone for some spoiled little brat. I was made for something greater than that." The man spits out and at the end of his words the Kumo ninja start advancing toward the three scared genin.

Kakashi takes that as his cue and dropps down from his branch landing neatly between the genin and the adult ninja.

Chapter Text

Chap 26

"Maa excuse me but I seem to have gotten lost on the road of life. Would any of you happen to have a map?" He asks in greeting and watches as their faces switch from startled and confused to angry and weary.

"Who the hell are you?!" Daisuke demands but one of the other ninja answers before Kakashi gets a chance.

"C-copy nin Kakashi Hatake." He stutters out and Kakashi has the satisfaction of watching 'Haizaki-sensei' turn pale white.

"What do you want?" Daisuke demands again but all the others are now looking very weary. Once again someone else answers before he gets a change too.

"He protects children."

"What?"

"All intelligence gathered on him the past few month’s points to him protecting children."

"Well there's one of him and five of us, we can take him, and then we can blame any injury's the kids have on him too." Daisuke says with a grin and Kakashi just smiles back as he replies.

"On the contrary it’s nine on five." the packs takes this as their cue and attack.

As the others leap out of the way of sharp teeth Kakashi leaps toward the genin. He manages to grab all three (just barely) and leap away. He knows the others will follow them soon so he lands them at the hollow of a tree before pulling the boys pouches off and rummaging through them.

They make a noise of protest but Kakashi passes them back as soon as he's extracted three spools of ninja wire and a bundle of kuni. Then he turns to Sakura.

"You’re the medic?" he asks and sees her eyes stray to his head band before she gulps and nods.

"Good. I'm going to set up a few traps out front, what I need you to do is feed the lightest stream of chakra into the wire, when you feel anyone intrude you spike your chakra ok?"

"umm I-" Sakura cuts herself off then takes a deep breath and braces herself before saying with more confidence.

"Yes sir."

And with that conformation Kakashi quickly sets a few simple but deadly traps at the opening of the hollow before returning to the fight.

Three bodies litter the ground already, 'Haizaki-sensei' among them. The mans neck looks like it was taken out by a set of large teeth and Kakashi feels vicious satisfaction looking at the corpse of the traitor. Bull and Pukkun are holding Daisuke at bay while the rest of the pack chases away the last of the ninja who look to be sporting a few bite marks of their own as well.

"Cowards!" Daisuke calls after them before he turns to face the copy-nin.

Kakashi doesn’t bother with witty banter or posturing, he goes straight for the kill.

This man has endangered HIS genin (Haizaki-sensei abandoned them so they are his now and no one would touch them again! EVER!).

A blade shoots out from the man's elbow but Kakashi deflected and grabbed his upper arm. As he does another blade pops out and cut through the center of his hand, (Kakashi makes a note to get metal plates attached to his gloves after this). Kakashi doesn’t let this stop him and he pulls his chakra into his palm, letting loose a lightning attack around the injury. The blade in his hand allows the electric current to flow right into Daisuke and the man screams in agony as he tries to pull away. But Kakashi is relentless and he holds on until the mans movements slow and eventually stops.

The chakra drain was definitely worth the quick, painful death.

Now to check on his genin. (His-His-His!)

Chapter Text

Chap 27

He approaches the hollow with caution. No need in scaring the cute little genin …at least not yet.

"Maa It's just me." He calls as he nears the trap, staying on the edge until he fells the chakra drain out of the wire. It leaves with a reluctant edge and Kakashi suspects that Sakura has told the others of his scratched head band already.

Sure enough when he reaches the hollow all three are in a battle ready stances with kuni at the ready. So he holds his hands in plain sight, just slightly away from his sides and waits.

It’s Sasuke who brakes the silence,

"What do you want?" the little brat demands.

"Maa right now I could use a good meal and a med-nin." He replies waving his injured hand and trying to keep the grin off his face. He’s trying not to scare them right now (at least not till they recognize that they are his. HIS!)

The genin all blink at him and Naruto opens his mouth but closes it a second later.

"I meant what do you want with us?" Sasuke practically grinds out, his eyes narrow into a mild glare (Sasuke probably thinks it's threatening but Kakashi's seen way worse.)

"hmm that depends."

"…Depends on what?" and now Sasuke looks a little murderous, it's kind of cute.

"On what the three of you want to do."

That answer causes some looks to pass between the genin and none of them seem to have an answer. A minute of silence later and Sakura bravely asks,

"And if we want to go home to Konoha?"

"I'd be happy to escort you." Kakashi says back automatically, he understands wanting to go home. He’d go to if he could.

"We don’t need an escort." Sasuke snaps out and Kakashi makes his move.

A simple body flicker puts him right behind the young avenger and a quick poke in the ribs has the boy leaping away beside Sakura.

"hmm of course you don't, it's not like there are missing nin out here that would love to get their hands on one of the last Uchiha and the village jinchuriki or anything." He says, pure sarcasm coating every word and the genin tense tighter than a bow string. Sakura even looks like she's going to put herself in front of Sasuke but is mouthing the word 'Jinchuriki?' like she doesn’t understand. He wonders if she’s trying to recall anything she’s read about them, which knowing how secretive certain things can be he doubts a civilian girl has ever come across it before.

"How do you know about that?" Naruto asks drawing Kakashi’s attention away from the pinkett and all three turn to look at the blond. The poor kid looks half lost and more than a little fearful, so Kakashi takes a little mercy on him and decides that he's not a Konoha ninja right now, he doesn't have to follow Konoha's rules.

"Because I knew your parents Naruto, your mother was the jinchuriki before you and your father was my sensei." He says into the silence and watches as the boy tries to absorb that information.

"W-what?.. Then why ? Why didn’t you-" the boy cuts himself off and looks away like it's a weakness, but Kakashi can hear the unasked questions Why didn’t you come for me? Why didn’t you take care of me? Why did you leave me alone?

With a heavy sigh Kakashi approaches the boy and kneels in front of him, completely ignoring the kuni that's aimed at his face. He’ll be able to move out of the way if Naruto eer remembers he’s holding the thing anyway.

"I was fourteen when you were born.” He starts and then has to swallow the sudden lump of emotions in his throat as he thinks back on those horrible, lonely days.

“I wasn't… I wasn't in a good place, I couldn’t even take care of myself, much less a new born. When you were older, I was assigned to the Anbu guard but I was ordered to stay out of sight and to only approach you if you were in immediate danger. I- I petitioned once… to see you, as um as myself, but I was turned down."

"B-but why?"

"Hokage's orders. It was supposed to keep you safe. So that nobody would figure out who… or what you are."

Chapter Text

Chap 28

 

"Naruto's a Jinchuriki?" Sasuke asks and Kakashi turns his head in the Uchihas direction but stays kneeling in front of the blond who seems to be in some sort of shock.

"Yes, my guess is he was put on the team with you in case he ever went out of control."

"Hn?" ah there is was, the Uchiha one syllable language, lucky for him Kakashi understood uchiha-speak.

"Don’t you know? It's rumored that the sharingan can control the tailed beasts."

The copy-nin had the pleasure of watching the little Uchiha's eyes widen and his mouth forming a little 'o' of shock. It was quite nice to see something other than gloom on the brats' face.

Kakashi's glee is cut short as Naruto catches his attention once more.

"My parents…did they… did they love me?" the blond asks in a small voice and Kakashi softens his stance even further as he gently pulls the kuni away.

"Yes Naruto they loved you, they loved you very much." He answers and the blond flings himself forward to cry on Kakashi's shoulder.

It takes Kakashi a second to remember that he was supposed to hug the kid at that point so he dutifully wraps the boy in his arms and holds him close.

Out of the corner of his eye he watches Sakura and Sasuke put down their kuni and stare at them in bewilderment.

 

It took a few more minutes to finally calm Naruto down but once he did it was fully dark out and the genin couldn’t exactly go back to camp.

"Maa why don’t we look at this like a survival exercise." He suggests and gives each genin a simple task to complete while he goes back to fetch supplies form the destroyed camp.

The pack meet him there as he’s placing the last corpse in a spare body scroll, and tell him they've run the other nin off. Kakashi figures the kumo ninja won’t be back but he asks the pack to stick around anyway, just in case.

Having his genin back again centers Kakashi in a way he hasn't felt since he landed in this alternate past. It is with a relieved sigh and a lighter heart that he helps his genin set up a new camp and decide on a guard rotation.

He'll figure out the rest in the morning, for now he'll bask in the contentment of having his team, his pack near him and safe.

 

 

 

Chapter Text

Chap 29

The next morning he watches as Naruto and Sasuke try to catch fish for breakfast. The key word is 'try', neither of them are having any success. Naruto because he's loud and impatient and Sasuke because of his incomplete traps. Both of them start out watching him wearily but soon grow too frustrated with their lack of success to pay much attention to the missing nin reading a romance novel.

"What has your sensei been teaching you? Cause it certainly wasn’t survival." He remarks after Sasuke nearly slices his hand open.

The comment causes Naruto to growl and start fussing about chakra control exercises.

Sakura, who decided to gather berries from a nearby bush, is the one who turns to him and answers.

"He had me studying to become a medic." She admits shy and uncertain, still cautious about being near a missing nin.

"oh? Hmm can you heal this?" he asks holding up his hand that had been speared by one of Daisuke’s many blades.

"umm I- well, I only know the theory."

"hmmm, no time to learn like the present." He says and motions her over, surprisingly the boys come as well.

"I'm going to show you the diagnostic jutsu, then I want you to run through the hand signs a few times before you try adding any chakra ok?"

The pinkeet looks nerves but nods determinedly. The boys also lean in curiously as he slowly makes the hand signs and pulls up the green chakra.

"Now your turn."

The rest of the morning is spent teaching all three how to do the mystic palm and properly catch a fish. Sakura turns out to be the best at both and Kakashi praises her with a pat on the head.

Soon their packed up and ready to travel. Sasuke and Sakura still look uncertain about trusting a missing ninja to get them home, but Naruto immediately begins asking stories about his parents and what they were like.

Kakashi tells him a few as they go along, making sure to keep a close watch on his surrounding and his chakra senses on high alert in case of an attack.

It's around lunch when Sakura asks a question that turns the tide of their relationship.

"Kakashi-sama?"

"Yes Sakura-chan?"

"Those men called you 'Copy-nin' why is that?"

"hmmm" He thinks for only a second before pulling up his headband and showing off Obitos eye.

Sasukes attention immediately snaps to him and before the Hatake can say anything more the young Uchiha is stomping toward him and hissing out angrily.

"That is a Sharingan! It belongs to my clan!" the situation only gets worse when Naruto blurts out.

"Sharingan? Whats that? Is it really important?"

Kakashi steps between the two boys when Sasuke’s glare turns to land on the blonde and pulls his scratched head band down again.

"It is very important Naruto, especially to Sasuke here. You see Sharingan is a kekkei genkai of the Uchiha clan, it is very powerful, and very dangerous."

"That still doesn't explain how you have the Sharingan." Sasuke says pointedly and Kakashi takes a deep breath before being very honest with his most stubborn genin (stubborn or not the boy was his genin now, HIS!)

"This eye was given to me by my friend Obito Uchiha on our last mission together. He died and gave me his eye as a replacement for the one I lost on that same mission." He nearly chokes on a few words but the sentences come out strong.

All three genin are staring at him now and silence reigns for a few minutes until Sasuke finds his voice again.

"The clan would never have let you keep it." He says it like a conviction, but Kakashi can hear the question underneath it.

"The clan nearly didn’t, in fact most of the old police force hated me because of it. I think there were a few attempts on my life in fact. But the Third put his foot down and they had to back off or risk insubordination."

"hn" is the little Uchihas elegant response.

"umm what's a kekki genkee?" Naruto asks and Sakura spends the next few minutes informing the blonde of what it was and why it was bad when someone stole it.

Ah he had missed this air headed blond.

Chapter Text

Chap 30

That night when they set up camp Sasuke approaches him away from the others,

"You should teach me how to use the Sharingan." He opens with, like the arrogant little brat he is.

"oh?"

"yes."

"whys that?"

"Because I need it to defeat … a certain man."

"If you're just going to use it for revenge against your brother then there's no point in teaching you."

"!"   That stalls the Uchiha in his tracks, but not for long.

"But you're already teaching us survival skills and you tried to single Sakura out for medical training even though she's a civilian born."

"It doesn’t matter if she's civilian born, she has better chakra control than you and Naruto combined, plus she already knows the theory she just needs practice."

"But why teach her medic stuff but not teach me about the Sharingan?" Sasuke asked in frustration his cheeks already a slight shade of red from his anger.

"Because Sakura learning to be a medic will help her teammates, were as you just admitted the only reason you want to learn the sharingan is for revenge."

"What does the team have to do with this, they'd just slow me down."

"Wrong." Kakashi said sternly, making sure to focus his intent on Sasuke so that the Uchiha would take his next words seriously.

"Konoha was founded on the basis of teamwork, the third shinobi war was started and won on team work. There are genin teams For A Reason. You think you can know everything and do everything yourself? Don’t be ridiculous! Even your brother is currently with an organization that uses two-man cells. Even if you get up the power to take on your brother and go after your revenge, he will have a partner watching his back. But if you continue like this, you will have no one…and take it from someone who knows, little Uchiha, having no one… it's a lonely existence." Kakashi sighed deeply before continuing.

"Right now, Sasuke you have the opportunity to take this mismatched team, and make it into something great. Weather that be the second coming of the Sannin or just a Family you chose for yourself. But whatever you decide just know that this team has the potential to be something far more than just another stepping stone on your path to revenge. "

He stops there and let those words sink in as he turns to Naruto and Sakura who have ended up eavesdropping on the conversation.

"You think we could be great?" Naruto asks and he says 'we' a little hesitantly but he turns to look at Sakura and Sasuke too.

"Of course, all you need is someone who's actually willing to teach you." He answers, not actually mentioning their dead former sensei but implying it hard enough.

"T-then could you teach us?" Sakura asks with a stutter and Kakashi doesn’t even think about it before saying

"Yes."

"Alright we got a new teacher! Take that Haizaki we don’t need you, we've got Kakashi-sensei now. Believe it!"

Kakashi feels his heart swell in his chest. Of course, Gaara calls him sensei and he enjoys teaching the red head but hearing Naruto say that, ....well it feels like he's finally home.

Chapter Text

Chap 31

The next morning in a fit of nostalgia Kakashi decides to do introductions.

"My name is Kakashi Hatake, my likes are my ninken, hot springs and a few things I probably shouldn’t mention to minors, my dislikes are people who abandon their comrades, brainwashing, sentient plants and evil goddesses. My goals for the future are to kill the sentient plant so he can't bring back the evil goddess and change the future.

Alright your turn."

Kakashi's introduction gets some raised eyebrows but the genin simply blink and carry on. Naruto goes first and his introduction is nearly word for word the same thing as last time.

"Maa Hokage huh? Like parents like son."

"My parents wanted to be Hokage?"

"Yep and you should have seen the look on Kushina-nee-sans face when Minato-sensei got the hat."

It takes a second for what he said to sink in.

"MY DAD WAS HOKAGE?!"

"He was the Fourth and he died saving you and the village from the kyubbi." Kakashi adds taking in Sakura and Sasuke’s wide eyes with amusement.

"Why didn’t anyone tell me?"

"Because it's dangerous knowledge and if it was spread around you would be the target for assassination from every major village and even a few minor ones."

"oh."

"Hmm you're next Broody." He tells Sasuke who’s looking at Naruto like he'd never seen the blonde before.

"My name is Sasuke Uchiha, I don’t have anything I particularly like or dislike-"

"Yes you do, you might as well share." Kakashi interrupted him and the Uchiha shoots him a glare before clearing his throat.

"I like Tomatoes and I dislike fangirls." He says shortly before continuing.

"My goal for the future is to ki- umm is to restore my clan and confront my brother." He amended after a quick look at Kakashi's covered Sharingan.

"ok pinky you’re up."

"Um My name is Sakura Haruno, I like the color red and .." she took a quick glance at Sasuke but despite the light blush on her cheeks she carries on well, "I dislike when Naruto is an Idiot-" "Hey!" "-and traitors like Haizaki who would sell kids to further their own gain. My goal for the future…I'd like to be a strong konoichi of Konoha."

Kakashi blinked in surprise. Had he really changed the future so much that Sakura was already looking to change her goal? She hadn’t even looked at Sasuke for that last part. For crying out loud he'd only talked to her the one time as Sukea on the park bench. Was that all she needed to see that she could be strong for herself?

He mentally jumped back to the present and what needed to be done.

"Alright then you all just need to pass one last test."

"A test? What kind of test?"

"A bell test." He answered pulling out two beaten and battered bells from his jacket packet.

(he'd been very surprised to find them originally and wondered what the him of this dimension had been thinking when he grabbed them.)

Chapter Text

Chap 32

Kakashi dodges Sasuke’s fire ball and switches with Naruto’s clone before leaping away from Sakura's trip wire. The three genin had started out with separate attacks but about an hour ago they'd decided to combine their forces and where trying not to trip over each other while going for the bells. Kakashi let’s them go at it til lunch when he calls an end to the test.

His genin lay on the ground and propped against trees huffing and puffing with exhaustion.

"You all pass." He says lightly and takes in there bewildered and excited faces with glee.

"But we didn't get the bells." Naruto points out, the only one of them with any breath to speak with.

"The test wasn’t about the bells, it was about team work. Jonin in Konoha test their genin based on what they value. My nindo is 'Those who break the rules are trash, but those who abandon their friends are worse than trash.' What I value is teamwork, and you three just showed that, so you pass. Welcome to team 7"

"YES! We did it. Believe it!" Once the blond is done celebrating Kakashi takes Naruto to catch lunch while Sakura and Sasuke catch their breath.

"hey hey Kakashi-sensei, are we gonna stay with you now? Does that make us missing nin too?"

"I don’t think it's a good idea for the three of you to go missing nin, not yet at least. There's a lot you still need to learn in Konoha but I'll be sure to teach you when I can. Besides it'd be nearly impossible for you to become Hokage if you went missing nin."

"… you think I can become Hokage?" the blonde asks and Kakashi turns from his finished trap to kneel in front of the blonde.

"I don’t think Naruto, I know you will." And with that he goes about placing two other traps and catching a few rabbits, the blond a content presence at his side.

When they return to camp Sasuke has a fire going and Sakura is sipping lightly at a canteen. He gives them each a portion of rabbit and a stick, then they all wait while the meat cooks.

"Hey Kakashi-sensei?" Naruto asks, this time with his eyebrows drown together and a frown on his lips that indicates he’s thinking very hard about something.

"Yes Naruto?"

"Why don’t you just come back to Konoha with us and become a Konoha ninja again?"

"ah…well I suppose I could ask but I don’t think it'd go over well."

"why not?"

"Dope, think. He's a missing nin, obviously he left Konoha for a reason." Sasuke berates.

"umm why did you leave Konoha Sensei?" Sakura asks before the two boys can start an argument, and all three genin turn to him in expectation.

He considers lying but he's been honest with them so far and he really doesn't want to bother trying to make something up.

"maa … I don’t remember." All three sweat dropped at the confession.

"You don’t remember?" Sasuke asks full of disbelief and Kakashi heaves a sigh.

"I woke up one day on a bank somewhere in river country with a headache the size of the hokage monument, a scratch in my head band and no memory of the past two years." He neglects to mention the fact that he was surrounded by dead Root hunter nin but if the kids retell the story he doesn’t want that detail getting out.

Now the three genin are looking at him through different eyes and Naruto once again brakes the silence.

"Don't worry Sensei, when I become Hokage I'll let you come back to the village. Believe it!"

"When you do Naruto I'll be waiting." He says sincerely and sees from the corner of his eye as Sakura and Sasuke both started giving the blond considering looks.

Chapter Text

Chap 33

Kakashi enjoyed the next two days to the fullest. He started every day by showing his genin a few survival skills, traps, skinning, ect. Then they moved on to a few chakra exercises and occasionally told a story about his old team. After lunch they would travel at a slow meander, Kakashi planned on milking this time for all it was worth.

On the morning of the third day Kakashi feels a familiar chakra signature coming toward them. He wonders if his old friend will be wearing his Anbu uniform.

"Ah looks like Konoha's sending out an Inuzuka to find you." He tells his genin.

"What's an Inzuna?" Naruto asks and is promptly hit over the head by Sakura.

"We were in class with Inuzuka Kiba you idiot use your brain." The pinkett scolds him.

"oh so it's a clan name then?" the blonde squints in concentration.

"Yes." She replies and then continues. "The Inuzuka are known for having dog companions and rivaling the Hyuuga and Aburame in tracking skills."

"Hinata is a Hyuuga right? And umm the bug guy from our class is an Aburame? Weren't all three of those guys put on a team?"

"yes."

"Why put all the trackers on one team?"

"umm I actually don't know the answer to that." Sakura replies and then to Kakashi's amusement all three genin turn to him for an answer.

"Best guess is that they're being trained to be a team of trackers. Also it might boost the clan relations since all three are children of the current clan heads."

All three genin nod at this information and turn to continue down the path but Kakashi stops them.

"Here's where we part for now. Inuzuka will be here in an hour or two and it's best if I'm long gone before that." He can see the protests forming on Naruto's lips before Sakura stops him by placing a gentle hand on the blonds shoulder.

"What should we tell the Hokage, Kakashi-Sensei?" she asks quietly.

"The truth, that Hitaro tried to sell you off and a missing konoha nin helped you escape. I'll leave it up to you all to decide what's best to tell and what's not. The only thing I ask is that you don't talk about Naruto being Jinchuriki or who his parents are. And Naruto it might also be best if you don’t say anything about bringing me back to the village. It will set a lot of people on edge and work against both of us in the future."

"ok sensei." The blond mumbles, clearly unhappy with this set up but agreeing none the less.

"What about the Sharingan?" Sasuke asks, looking at the covered eye.

"I'll leave that up to you, the Sharingan is your clans kekkei genkai, they know I have it but keeping your own knowledge of it close to your chest might be best." He answered, and the little Uchiha replied with a determined nod.

A few more questions are asked and answered before Kakashi pats his genin on the head in good bye. Naruto of course flings himself at Kakashi's waist in a hug, nearly tackling him to the ground in the process. When he finally managed to pry the blonde off (with much reluctance on both parts) Sakura steps forward and gave him a short hug as well. "Be safe sensei." She tells him. Sasuke of course simply gives him a 'hn' and excepts a second head pat.

"Bye Kakashi-sensei" is called at three different volumes as he sprints away from his genin.

Chapter Text

Chap 34

Naruto keeps yelling and waving long after Kakashi-sensei is out of sight. He misses the man already.

"Don't Worry Sensei When I'm Hokage I'll Bring You Back Home!"

"Quite yelling dope the Inuzuka might hear you." Sasuke tells him.

"Sasuke's right. We should probably get our story straight before they show up here too."

"Huh? Don’t we just need to tell them the truth like Kakashi-sensei said?" Naruto asks confused.

"Yes we're going to tell them the truth but we also need to leave some things out, or we might be in trouble." Sakura answers.

"Oh like what sensei said about not telling old man Hokage about bringing him back to the village when I become Hokage?"

"Exactly. We need to decide what's safe to tell and what's going to get us in trouble." His pink haired team mate says.

"No talking about the Sharingan." Sasuke states and Naruto bristled at his tone but remembers that sensei had said it was Sasuke's choice so he lets it go…..reluctantly.

"Ok so that's no Sharingan, no Jinchuriki, no Naruto's parents, umm anything else?" Sakura asks her teammates curiously.

"We should leave it there, if we leave too many things out they'll notice the blanks." The Uchiha puts in. Naruto is pretty glad they stopped there, he isn’t sure if he could remember what to say and what not to say if they kept adding.

Sakura makes a determined face before pulling the two of them in close, "Alright this is what we're gonna do…."

            ***

Yami Inuzuka stands in the Hokages office cursing his luck. In just a week he would have been back in Anbu instead of being assigned as a Jonin tracker to two Chunin on a retrieval mission for a missing genin team. It isn't until he finds out 'what' genin team has gone missing that he realizes why he was chosen for the mission. With the village jinchuriki and the Uchiha brat on the team it's a wonder they waited the customary two days before sending out a search party.

When Yami first heads from the gate he thinks it'll be three days before they catch the scent they need. He thinks he'll find a dead body and traumatized kids….how many kids will be the question.

Instead they find a scent not far from the village gates, carried on the wind, and within two hours Yami and his team find the three genin meandering down the road to Konoha. They look calm and relaxed, a little nervous but nothing too bad. The only oddity is the fact that their sensei is nowhere in sight.

"Report." He barks at them once they’re close enough and to his surprise both boys turn to the pinkett.

"Haizaki Jiro has committed treason against Konoha and tried to sell his genin to Kumo. The exchange was intercepted and we were rescued by a missing nin who escorted us until two hours ago." She replies steadily.

Yami takes a second to absorb this information as a familiar scent tickles his nose.

"And the name of this missing-nin?" he asks, then watches as the genin scuffle their feet and look at the ground. He almost thinks they've made up the story to stay out of some kind of trouble but then they give him a name.

A name that sends a chill down his spine and makes that familiar scent very daunting.

"Copy-nin Hatake Kakashi."

Chapter Text

Chap 35

"-then he taught us how to fish, and climb trees and Kakashi-sensei was way better at showing us stuff than that stupid traitor Haizaki. He even showed Sakura-chan how to do a medic scan technique thingy-"

"It's called Mystic Palm Jutsu, Naruto."

"Yeah that, and he told us that teamwork was important and gave us a bell test, oh I think I told you that already-"

As Naruto rambles on Hiruzen can feel his headache growing. The kids have been in his office ten minutes and he feels like he's gone two verbal rounds with the Hyugga elders.

He's very unsure how to take all the information he's been given by the children in front of him. Yes there had been some suspicion about Haizaki but nothing crucial. The fact that the man is a traitor stings, but the kids hardly seem affected. In fact they seem almost giddy, even the Uchiha who has said all but three words has a smug air about him and the other two haven't stopped smiling since they walked through the gate. It's a little unnerving actually, and that's not even bringing Hatake into it.  

Hatake Kakashi who had barely been seen in two years since he became a missing nin. Now he's escorting civilians, making friends with Suna and rescuing stray genin? Excuse him, becoming a SENSEI to stray genin?

Nothing is making since and Hiruzen feels like he needs to have another talk with Danzo about that mission from two years ago. He suddenly feels like more happened there than his old friend let on.

With any luck Kakashi let something slip to the kids about his plans but trying to figure it out from Naruto will be nearly impossible, according to the boy Hatake's plans for the future involve killing a sentient plant and a moon goddess of all things. So with a puff of his pipe Hiruzen lifts his hand to halt Naruto's story and then asks all three of them.

"Did Hatake tell you anything related to his current situation? People he's in contact with? A place he likes to go? Anything significant that's happened to him recently?"

All three kids get quiet before looking at each other, even Naruto isn't saying anything. Which means the answer is yes to at least one of the questions. The fact that they pause worries the Hokage. The children are showing loyalty to a missing nin whether they relies it or not, the question is will that new loyalty to their savior outweigh the loyalty to their village.

Luckily the Haruno girl bites her lip and steps forward.

"We asked him why he was missing nin."

"Oh? What did he say?" Hiruzen asks but he honestly expects that Hatake would either avoid the question or give an outrageous lie that the Hokage is going to have to correct swiftly.

Instead the girl looks at her team mates again and then tells the Hokage the last thing he expected.

"He says he doesn’t remember. He woke up in River country with a headache, no memory of the last two years and a scratch on his headband."

WHAT?!

Chapter Text

Chap 36

"He could have been lying." Ibiki says to the assembled team that has been called to analyze the new information on one Hatake Kakashi.

"Or he could have been telling the truth." Anko counters with but Inoichi interrupts her to add his own input.

"The fact that he is no longer hiding and is instead traipsing around in plain sight, helping caravans and sand nin and stray genin makes me think it's not a lie."

"Troublesome, the reports from team Genma tell us that he is not in the same state of mind that he was several years ago. They say he was treating it like a one sided spar instead of a fight, and Genma himself reported to the Hokage that he was smiled at."

"Hold on the guy wares a mask, how can you tell when he's smiling?" Anko interrupts.

"Go ask Genma, he's the one who put it into the report." Shikaku tells her around a yawn.

"How would he lose his memory though?" Inoichi asks bringing them back to topic.

"…Head trauma." Ibiki answers slowly and everyone suddenly makes a point to be staring anywhere but Ibiki's head.

"That still doesn't explain his new skills or why he moves differently now." Inoichi continues.

"He's a missing nin, he probably had to develop new skills to keep from getting caught. Konoha itself has only had three sightings of him in the past two years and none of them have been a major confrontation. The guys a genius remember he could have easily acquired new skills to survive." Ibiki points out.

"Yes but if what he's saying is true about the memory loss then he wouldn't have those new skill." Inoichi argues back, his blond ponytail swinging behind him as he shakes his head in the negative.

"Unless he already had them but never got to use them." Anko interjects and everyone looks at her. With a roll of her eyes she explained,

"You just pointed out that Hatake is a genius. But what we’re forgetting about is that he also has the Sharingan, you know the eye that copies everything? For crying out loud he's known for being the man with a thousand jutsu, he probably has more things in that eye than even he knows about. He's had that eye since he was thirteen, he became Anbu at 14 and Captain not long after. Given that carrier path it's possible he came across a lot of obscure jutsu and skills that he wouldn’t have used in the village. Not to mention if the Sharingan can still recalled things that he doesn't. Hatake wears a headband over it most of the time, so even if the Sharingan did show him some things about the past two years it would mostly be fights or things that would help him survive. So if his claim if amnesia is true then he will still have those skill to fall back on but not the story to go with it.” Anko finishes her rant with a huff and sits back in her chair, practically daring anyone to tell her she’s wrong.

No one does.

Chapter Text

Chap 37

Sakura sighs heavily as she makes her way to the training field. Not the one they used with Hizaki but one that Kakashi-sensei had talked about using with his team. The training field that held the memorial stone. She brought a few flowers just to show a bit of respect but she is surprised to find that she isn’t the only one there.

Naruto and Sasuke look up at her approach but don't say a word as she comes forward to place the flowers down. Silently the three stand looking for the names of Kakashi-sensei's precious people.

 Uchiha Obito is with the rest of the names Sakura remembers being mentioned in class about the third war. Nohara Rin is about four rows over and twelve lines down. Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina  are together, right at the top of what Sakura guesses are the victims of the Nine-tails attack.

Sakura's not sure how long the three of them stand there in silence, tracing the names with their eyes. But when Naruto takes a step back and starts walking away Sakura doesn’t hesitate to follow him. Behind her she can hear the crunch of Sasuke's sandals on the ground and knows he's coming too.

When there back in the training ground Naruto straightens up and then faces then both with a look in his eyes that has Sakura comparing it to steel.

"I'm gonna train hard, and I'm gonna be Hokage and then I'm gonna brin- I mean I'm gonna fulfil the promise I made. Believe it! Who here is with me?" he questions the two of them.

"hn Dobe." Sasuke answers but doesn't leave so Sakura takes that to mean that he’s in. Sakura herself thinks of her promise to become a strong kunichi, of Sukea's picture and Kakashi's words. Then she turns to Naruto with determination and a nod.

"What are we waiting for, lets get started!" she says with a bright grin.

Chapter Text

Chap 38

Kakashi waits a week before gliding into Konoha under the guise of Sukea once again. He chats for a while with the gate guards and sells a few nice scenery pictures to a calendar maker before heading over to the ramen stand.

To his great surprise Naruto, Sakura, and Sasuke are all sitting on stools and chatting, well Naruto and Sakura are chatting Sasuke just seems to be nodding along.

Sukea is about to call hello when Naruto spots him out of the corner of his eye.

"SUKEA-SAN!!" he yells in greeting before flying off his stool and straight into the camera man. If Kakashi weren't playing the civilian the flying tackle wouldn't have done a thing, as it is they both go tumbling into the dirt and Sukea puts a protective had around his precious camera.

"NARUTO DON’T JUST TACKLE PEOPLE LIKE THAT!" Sakura yells at him, hurrying off her own stool and pulling the blonde up by his arms. She gives her teammate a quick glance to look for injuries before turning to the man still on the ground.

"I'm so sorry about him Sukea-san, Naruto is just use to dealing with ninja. Are you hurt anywhere?"

"Maa just a few scratches, no harm done." He replies, showing off his scrapped arm where he prevented the camera from hitting the ground. Sakura takes one look at them then turns to face him fully with a polite smile on her lips.

"Sukea-san, I'm training to become a medic-nin, If you're ok with it I'd like to practice healing your wounds."

"That's very nice of you Sakura-chan. Go right ahead." He replies and holds his scratched up arm out to her.

Very slowly Sakura walks through the hand signs before adding chakra and then gently places a pale green glowing hand on his arm. It takes a few seconds and Sakura looks like she's concentrating far harder than necessary but the scratches heal over with only mild lines in their place.

"That's amazing Sakura-chan." Sukea praises and Sakura's face turns faintly pink.

"Yeah. Sakura-chan is amazing, Kakashi-sensei knew she was medic right away." Naruto boasts on his team mates behalf.

"Oh you got a new sensei?" Sukea asks, and Kakashi wonders what his little genin have told everyone.

"Naruto!" Sakura scolds in a harsh whisper and the blonde has the decency to look chastises for all of three seconds before Teuchi calls his order from inside his ramen stand.

The blonde rushes back to his seat, thanks the smiling chef and then dives into the bowl. Sakura looks miffed at this behavior but Sukea just laughs and slides into the stool on Naruto's other side. Ayame gives him a friendly wave and turns back to her work.

"Did your mission go well?" he asks them and Naruto opens his mouth but is cut off by Sasuke this time.

"It went fine, but we're not supposed to give mission details to civilians." He says with a light huff, and Kakashi can’t help but chuckle at him.

"I suppose that's true, but I'm glad you all made it back safely." Sukea says giving all three a warm smile before focusing on Sasuke.

"I'm Sukea by the way, it's nice to meet Naruto and Sakura's last teammate."

"hn"

Kakashi can already tell Sasuke has dismissed him because of his civilian appearance… he'll have to teach the boy better than that in the future. Kakashi hides his secret grin by turning it on Ayame as she serves his eggplant ramen. The poor girl turns beet red.

After checking on his genin Kakashi doesn’t stick around long. But he does places three timed seals above each of their beds that will release a little gift in about three days. By which time Sukea will be long gone from the village and no one will find a trace of the copy cat -nin.

Chapter Text

Chap 39

Sakura is rudely awakened by a heavy weight suddenly thumping into her belly. It startles her so badly she accidentally knocks over her bed side lamp and the resounding crash has her parents running into her room at high speed.

"Sakura! What happened!" her mother calls loudly and flicks on the light.

Once all the Haruno's have stopped blinking at the sudden light all their eyes are drown to a large scroll that still rests on Sakura's bed.

On top of the scroll is a small drawing of a henohenomoheji.

Without thinking Sakura rushes to open the scroll and then squeals in excitement when she see's it's The library’s scroll containing notes from Tsunade-himi. Her parents seem alarmed but Sakura couldn't care less.

Her teacher just gave her a scroll FULL OF HAND WRITTEN NOTES FROM TSUNADE OF THE SANIN.

Her missing-nin teacher just snuck into Konoha to give her a scroll!!!!

Sakura feels so happy and grateful she flings open the window and yells loudly into the night.

"THANK YOU KAKASHI-SENSEI!!!"

Sakura is completely unaware of the poor Anbu who had been creeping closer to her widow since the crash, hoping to catch the copy-nin off guard. He had been about to enter the glass himself when she flung them open to yell into the night. Now he's hanging on by his chakra infused finger tips as the girl continues to squeal happily on the inside.

Anbu Stag is not looking forward to reporting this to the Hokage.

Across the village and closer to the red lights district Naruto is rudely awakened by something knocking him in the head. Blurry eyed and groggy he turns on the light to see a book laying on his pillow.

"The Tales of the Gutsy Shinobi" the title reads and Naruto opens the cover to a loose piece of paper that has a henohenomoheji scribbled on it. With a yawn Naruto puts both book and paper on his bedside table and crawls back into bed. He'll look at it again in the morning.

In another part of the village, in the abandoned Ghost town of the Uchiha compound Sasuke is woken out of his nightmare by something hitting him in the back. Instinct hits him and he's out of bed and on his feet with a kunai in hand and at the ready.

When nothing happens for ten seconds Sasuke reluctantly turns on the light and finds that his bed is covered in loose paper.

He picks the first one up and finds it's a bingo book page of his brother. A quick look through the rest shows one other bingo page with what looks like a land shark on it and the rest is covered in some of the worst hand writing Sasuke has ever seen. But eventually he finds a picture of a henohenomoheji on one page and then a note saying 'Learn to fight without looking your opponent in the eye- see Maito Guy'

Chapter Text

Chap 40

The next morning all three genin find themselves summoned to the Hokages office and ordered to bring their newest possessions.

All three of them obey but Sakura is scanning the scroll as quickly as she can, Naruto has his face deep in the book and Sasuke is altering between glaring at anyone to close and flipping through all the loses pages he has.

The Hokage gives an internal sigh before smiling and starting a light interrogation.

"Good morning Team 5-" he begins and is immediately cut off by all three genin correcting him at different volumes

"Team 7!"

"Ah yes, my mistake, Good morning Team 7. Last night each of you were given a gift from an unknown source-"

"It's not unknown Kakashi-sensei gave them to us" Naruto interrupted, glaring over the edge of his book.

"And you know it was him because?" the Hokage questions. He’s hoping that one of the children had spotted the missing nin, or that Hatake had taken the time to talk to one of them. The Anbu he'd assigned to watch the children since the incident had reported seeing nothing that night except for the children getting out of bed and finding the various gifts.

But instead of confirming if Hatake was actually in Konoha all three children pull out various pieces of paper with a henohenomoheji written in what the Hokage recognizes as Hatake's messy hand writing.

This time the Hokage does sigh aloud.

"Be that as it may, the fact that these items were given to you by a missing nin makes them subject to scrutiny. You will be given the items back if they prove harmless to Konoha." He declares. He expects resistance with this, mainly from Naruto, but to his surprise the young Haruno girl is the one to step forward.

"Hokage-sama," she begins respectfully and then turns the scroll so that he can see the tag attached.

"This is a scroll already of Konoha, written by Tsunade of the Sanin and can be found in the level 3 archive of the library. Genin like myself are only allowed to check this out if their sensei signs for it. I have no village assigned sensei but you should probably check the library to see if Kakashi-sensei signed for it's release." She said diplomatically and so the Hokage waved an Anbu off to do just that.

The masked individual returned seconds later, papers in hand. He paces it gently on the Hokage’s desk and points at the henohenimoheji that is the last in line.

The Hokage takes a moment to absorb the fact that a missing nin had gotten into their archives undetected to grab a medic scroll and even used proper checkout procedure for it.

Then he turns back to young Haruno. The steely look in her green eyes would make her a fearsome medic nin some day, perhaps that was why Kakashi was trying to help her. If she remained loyal to Konoha then being a medic would make her a great asset to the village but if she was not….

The Hokage put the thought from his mind for now and said,

"The scroll will be checked for any tampering and then returned to you Haruno-chan." The girl nods and hands the thick scroll over to the Anbu before stepping back.

Then Sasuke steps forward.

Chapter Text

Chap 41

"Hokage-sama much of this information is related to the Sharingan, my clans kekki genkai. As it is of my clan I have the right to it's possession by law." The Uchiha concludes and the Hokage gives an internal wince. He wonders if Sasuke knows of Kakashi's sharingan, the kids hadn't reported it but that doesn't mean they left some information out.

"A Yamanaka will be required to look over them briefly for anything discriminatory but you may be present for the duration." The Hokage compromises quickly not wanting to get in a clan battle, even if the clan was only down to one.

Sasuke seems to think it over before nodding and stepping back with his team.

Naruto looks at both his team mates and then huffs before stepping forward and putting the book down on the Hokages desk.

"Can I at least have a copy of it? It was written by some guy named Jiraiya and the main character has my name Jiji." The blonde pouts but doesn't reach to take the book back.

Hiruzen takes one look at the book to confirm the title before reaching into a draw further down his desk and into the very back where he placed the copy that Jiraiya had given him so long ago.

When he passes it over the desk Naruto bounces with glee and grabs it with a quick 'thanks ji-chan' before stepping back to join his team mates and immediately flips the book open to begin reading again.

With all that taken care of the Hokage dismisses the new 'team 7' and then asks the Anbu to search for any other paper trails the copy-nin may have left.

It turns out that paperwork has been filed for a team transfer regarding 'team 7', an internship has been filled out and left at the hospital for Sakura Haruno, a tab has been made at Ichiraku Ramen under a henohenomoheji, and Might Gai has reported that a scroll for mentorship with Sasuke Uchiha was left in his house, the only blank spots requiring a signature from both participants.

Hiruzen was under the impression that Hatake-san hated paperwork, but given his lousy hand writing the Hokage wonders if this isn't just a way to further stress him out. After all, the places that the copy-nin would have had to get into undetected was a bit mind boggling….. the fact that he did it just to fill out paperwork makes the Hokage wonder just how hard the poor boy got hit in the head.

Chapter Text

Chap 42

 Kakashi strolls lazily to the gates of Suna and finds Gaara plus sibling waiting for him.

"Maa no Baki-san today?" he asks in greeting as he pats Gaara affectionately on the head.

"He has a meeting with the Kazekage." The red head replies looking more like a content cat than a boy.

Kakashi nods, doesn’t ask any further questions and simply leads the three over a few duns and politely remains in sight of the gate guards since Baki is not with them today.

Half way through training Temari asks him an unexpected question.

"Why don't you want to stay in Suna Kakashi-san? I know Baki-sensei has been trying to find a way to entice you to join. He would even let you step in as our sensei if you asked."

"Ah Temari-chan you’re a smart girl." He replies and thinks a moment before answering.

"Suna is a nice place and for all the heat and sand there are still many wonderful things about the desert. But the desert is not home for me, just like kiri could never be a home for you." The girl winces at the thought of living in the bloody mist but doesn't let it detour her from the conversation.

So Kakashi tells her a bit about his beloved village, about the interesting people and the different clans, and the variety of food and his favorite places to eat. About the memorial stone and even some about his precious people that are long gone. He gives her the good things, but he also warns her of the bad.

He tells her as much as he dares about the place that he calls home.

"But isn't a home less about the place it's at and more about the people who are there?" she asks and Kakashi has a sneaky suspicion that someone put her up to this.

"hmm perhaps but Konoha does hold some precious people for me, and some very fond memories too."

"But you’re a missing -nin from Konoha, it's not like you can go back so easily right?"

"hmmm well it depends on how well I disguise myself."

That's stops her for a second, and now the brothers are interested in the conversation too.

"Disguise yourself?" Konkuro asks and the boy looks a little intimidated still but he's brave enough to ask questions now which Kakashi counts as progress.

"Yes, I can go to Konoha any time as long as I disguise myself really well." He explains and watches the gears start turning in their heads. It's Tamari of course that asks the question they’re all thinking.

"Have you snuck into Konoha in disguise yet?"

In response Kakashi just chuckles and says,

"Maa who knows."

Unfortunately for Tamari that's when Baki shows up to join them, and the subject gets changed to training.

Afterwards Baki sends the genin back to the village and turns to Kakashi with a serious look on his face.

"Hatake-san some time ago you said you wouldn't give any information about Konaha to Suna is this still true?"

Suddenly somethings clicks.

Tamari was trying to persuade him to join Suna, but not just to be there sensei. After all the Chunin exam is in three months. The same Chunin exam that was turned into an invasion after Orochimaru killed the Kazekage in order to wear his body like a second skin.

Instead of answering Baki, Kakashi asks a question of his own.

"Has the Kazekage been in a meeting with Orochimaru by chance?"

His fellow jonin suddenly loses color.

Chapter Text

Chap 43

"How did you- no never mind I don’t want to know how you found out Orochimaru approached us. I just need to know if you're willing to give some information about Konoha."

"Information for an invasion?"

"……You know don't you?"

"Do I know that Orochimaru is planning to use Suna in his attack on Konoha and try to kill the Hokage? Yes I do. I also know that if your Kazekage went to meet with him then Rasa is most likely dead and the man you just got out of a meeting with was Orochimaru wearing his skin."

If possible Baki pales further and stamper out a,

"W-what?"

Kakashi would take pity on the man but he did kill Hayate in a different life so Kakashi just continues on.

"Orochimaru is a skilled man, he's also a sick man. Konoha chased him out because of his unethical experiments on the human body. He has the ability to wear another like a second skin and then discard it like the snake he is when he's through with it. Rumor has it that he's keeping himself young by switching host bodies."

He takes a breath and then looks Baki directly in the eyes,

"We need to act now before Orochimaru causes even more damage."

It takes a few seconds for the meaning of Kakashi's words to sink in.

"You want to attack him."

"No, I want to kill him. If the Kazekage is already dead-"

"He isn't."

"…He isn't?"

"No. Orochimaru only sent a messenger last week, their supposed to have a face to face meeting tomorrow."

"Cancel it. Tell him an emergency came up."

"Like what?"

"Like a missing-nin kidnapped the Kazekage's children."

Baki just sort of stares at him for a few minutes.

"And what are we supposed to tell him after that? That we've changed our minds about invading the village that's been stealing our missions?"

Kakashi takes a moment to think this problem over but eventually comes up with a workable solution.

"No go along with it, proceed to make plans to invade Konoha."

"What? You don’t care if we invade Konoha?"

"I do actually. What I'm telling you is to use Orochimaru's plan against him. Warn Konoha, help them set up a trap for the Sanin, fight with them instead of against. Make them grateful, show them you are their ally."

"….that might actually work."

"Of course it will."

"But how do we convince the Kazekage?"

"Oh don’t worry I'll do that when I see him tomorrow."

Baki gives him a look, one that clearly says he’s questioning Kakashi’s sanity…..what little the copy-nin may have left.

Chapter Text

Chap 44

Bright and early the next morning, long before the sun even rises, Kakashi uses his sharingan eye to teleport right to the balcony of the Kage residence. He expects the trip to wear him out, or at least make him tired, but there was no such thing. In fact, his eye barley even hurts after the use. Which is odd but Kakashi has no time to dwell on it as he enters the building and heads straight to Gaaras room.

The red head is already awake when Kakashi knocks on the half open door.

"Kakashi-sensei?"

"Hello Gaara-kun would you like to come with me for a bit?"

The red head tilts his head to the side thinking for a moment,

"Are Tamari and Kankuro coming too?"

"If they want to."

"Are we coming back?"

"Yep, your Father's going to come pick you up."

"ok"

And with that they go to Tamari next. The girl grumbles a bit about being woken up but yawns and tells them to go wake Kankuro while she changes.

Kankuro yelps and tries to attack them with a puppet but when he sees who it was he just huffs and grumbles and then asks if they’re getting breakfast first.

Kakashi hands him a ration bar.

"You're surprisingly cooperative." He tells them as they all slipped out the window.

"Baki-sensei warned us last night that you might be coming." Tamari answers back.

"Last night? It's still night Tamari, I'm losing precious sleep because of this. Couldn't you just make an appointment like everyone else?" Kankuro complains aloud. At least the boy isn't acting scared of being kidnapped.

Half an hour later Kakashi set's up a small camp at the nearest unoccupied oasis and lays his bedroll out for the kids to catch some more sleep, only Kankuro takes him up on his offer.

Tamari once again tries to persuade him to join Suna, listing all it’s great values, which apparently include roasted scorpion tail deliciousness. When that fails, she starts asking him about different techniques he'd run into being a missing nin and how he countered them when he was attacked. Gaara simply makes himself comfortable by leaning into Kakashi's side and listening as his sister fires off a million and one questions.

By morning light Kakashi can see the Kazekage with a group of Anbu and Baki heading in his direction. The Anbu split off and surrounded them in a lose circle about a mile out while Baki and Rasa simply walked forward.

"Yo." Kakashi greets with an eye smile.

"Kankuro wake up! Dad's here!" Tamari yells at her brother before kicking him out of the bed roll. Gaara simply watches his sibling interact with each other before getting up and turning to Kakashi for his customary head pat and then joining Baki at his father's side. Kankuro and Tamari join him, continuing to squabble as all four walk to the Anbu line.

Then it was just the Kazekage and Kakashi at his little camp.

Chapter Text

Chap 45

Rasa sits down on the log across from the missing nin who kidnapped his children and wonders just what he’s getting himself into.
Baki had warned him last night that Hatake was planning to kidnap his kids in order to get a meeting, but Rasa had paid it little attention. He hadn’t thought it possible for a single ninja to enter the heart of his territory and escape without injury or alarm…apparently he thought wrong.

So now Rasa’s here listening as Kakashi Hatake of the Sharingan tells him about Orochimaru and his ability to hide in another person's skin. He listens as the missing nin explains that he knows of the invasion plan, (and no Baki didn’t tell me I actually knew about it before he did so rest at ease.). He listens as the man who has been hailed as a genius tells him of a plan to work with the Snake Sanin and also strengthen Suna's ties to Konoha.

At the end Rasa can only agree, because really what choice does he have?

The man before him is one of Konoha's top missing nin. ( And what is Konoha doing that all there geniuses go missing nin on them? Hatake, the Uchiha boy, not to mention Orochimaru.) He is also a teacher to Rasa's children and has made it very clear that if Rasa intends to go through with the Snakes plan he will not be helping Suna.

Rasa is also not about to deny that having this man as an ally has had more benefit for Suna already and continued association can only help. (Plus the fact that all three of his children may actually try to kill him should he even hint at harming the copy-nin)

With that decision made Kakashi gives him what is probably a smile using his only visible eye before waving at Baki and the kids, who wave back, and tells Rasa he'll be in touch.
Then the man pops into a cloud of dust and Rasa is left wondering how long he's been talking to a shadow clone.

With a heavy sigh he stands and makes his way over to Baki and his Anbu guards, the later of whom are looking around and clearly on edge after Hatake's ‘escape’.

"Kazakage-sama." Baki greets and all four turns with him to head back to the village.

Along the way Rasa has the chance to actually look at his children, something that he hasn't done in years.
What he sees surprises him.

Temari is no longer a little girl but a skilled Konoichi, walking with her back straight and constantly checking her surrounds even as they pass the village gates. Kankuro has pulled a small puppet out of who knows where and is tinkering away as they walk, taking his cues from Temari and Gaara about where to step so as not to run into anything. And Gaara…..Gaara is the one that surprises him the most.

The madness has reduced in his eyes, the sand is not stirring under his feet ready to kill, he is watching his siblings and Baki with a bit of fascination and wonder.

Rasa wonders just what Hatake did to his children in such a short time.

Chapter Text

Chap 46

Kakashi is on his way back to Konoha again,( what can he say, he misses his genin) when he hears the familiar sound of battle. Without much thought he summons the pack to do a little scouting and slowly makes his way undetected toward the noise.

By the time he can see the figures locked in battle Pakkun is back to give a report.

"Looks like Rock ninja ambushing a pair of Leaf Chunin." The pug says softly and Kakashi takes a second to thank him before jumping into the fight himself. He maybe a missing nin to them, but he’s still going to protect Konoha.

The rock ninja outnumber the chunin five to two, with only a few traps keeping the Konoha ninja from being overwhelmed.

Then Kakashi puts a Chidori through the biggest ninja's heart and the tide of the battle turns.

Kakashi lets the chunin take care of one rock nin while he engages the other three. He's not trying to brag, but he doesn’t even have to reveal his sharingan before the whole fight is over and he's standing over the bodies. Some of which might still be breathing.

Then he's looking at the alarmed faces Iruka Umino and Kaito Yamanaka.

"Yo" Kakashi greets with a jaunty wave that seems to set the poor chunin even more on edge …tho that might be the blood splatter he accidentally just flicked off his fingers …hmmm oops.

The chunin don’t move from their defensible position so Kakashi takes the opportunity to start searching through the downed shinobi's belongings.

(What he's a missing nin, his supplies have to come from somewhere.)

He sorts the bandages to one side and kunai to the other, out of the chunin reach because he's not stupid, and tucks the latest version of the bingo book into his very battered vest.

When he pulls a decorative scroll off one of the still breathing bodies Iruka makes a chocked noise and then looks like he immediately regrets it when Kakashi's attention focuses in on him.

"Something wrong Umino-sensei?" he asks in a lazy drawl that has both men tensing up and giving him wary looks. Is he really that scary?

"Ho-how do you know my name?" Iruka stampers out instead of answering.

"Maa you're Naruto's favorite teacher of course." And just like that the nervous stuttering is gone and Iruka straightens his spine before staring him in the eye.

"What do you know about Naruto?" the chunin practically demands.

Kakashi can't help but chuckle at Iruka's mother henning, even a light threat to the boy and this little teacher would try tackling a bijuu.

Chapter Text

Chapter 47

Iruka can't help the shiver that goes down his spine as the missing nin laughs at him.

This man is one of konoha's top S-rank ninja and Iruka is a mere chunin teacher, of course the man is laughing at him.

But Iruka doesn't back down.

He knows that team 5 -errr team 7 ran into this ninja, it's all over the mission room, and even if it wasn’t, Naruto waylaid him at Ichiruka's before his own mission to show off the new book the man supposedly gave him. Even with all the praise the blonde had for the man Iruka had his reservations, I mean the man was a missing nin for crying out loud, but he may have been willing to give him the benefit of the doubt. Especially since the rumors out of T&I say he lost his memory.

But he just saw the man take down four of the five opponents he and Kaito had been facing in less than three minutes, then give them a little greeting while flicking the blood off his fingers. Clearly this man was not sane, but really what missing nin was?

And on a side note, what was it with Naruto and having traitors for teachers. First Misuki, then Hiazaki, now Hatake? Once is happenstance, twice is coincidence, but THREE TIMES??? Yeah, that’s a pattern.

Speaking of patterns…the scroll that Hatake had pulled from the dead- umm defeated opponent was the one Iruka's team had been originally sent to retrieve. Before they were ambushed on the way home and lost their third teamma-

That thought is cut short when Hatake stops laughing and looks at Iruka once more.

"Maa maa little sensei, I'm not gonna harm Naruto, or any of my cute little genin."

"And I'm supposed to just take your word on that?"

"hmmm I swear on my sensei's devoured soul that I will never intentionally harm his son or any other children in my care…how's that?"

What?!?

"W-what?!"

"... I swear o-"

"I heard you I just don’t understand …why?"

"Maa does it really matter?" He countered with and Iruka was thrown for loop. Of course it mattered!

Just as he was about to start shouting at the missing nin like he was one of his stubborn students, Kaito speaks up.

Chapter Text

Chapter 48

"Pardon me Hatake-san, but are you planning on doing anything with that scroll?" Kaito politely asks the Copy-cat before Iruka can start yelling.

I mean really Iruka? The man is an S-rank Missing-nin that managed to hide for two years and recently took on three of konoha's best jonin. Don’t Tick Him Off!

"Maa this scroll Yamanaka-san?" the one-eyed man asks, lightly tossing the mission objective in the air.

The same scroll that Rukia died for.

-No don’t think about it! Compartmentalize! You can think of her and the literal bomb of information after the S-rank threat is gone!-

"Yes." Kaito answers shortly. He knows you’re not supposed to tell the enemy that they have something you want but right now he's just trying to keep himself and his last teammate alive, and if he can negotiate peacefully for the scroll then so be it.

"Maa I might trade for it." The Copy-nin answers and Kaito's heart skips a beat. Great now he's got the guys attention, but what can he possibly offer him? kunai? Bandages? He just raided those things off the rock ninja.

"What would you trade for?" he asks a little desperately and tries not to let it show. The man could honestly just take what he wants really, he just pointed out his teacher was the Fourth Hokage and he knows secrets the village would rather stay buried- Focus!-

"Do you have any Akimichi food pills?" the S-rank threat asks.

"Yes!"

"I'll take those." Hatake says and waits patiently while Kaito gets them out of his vest. Once Hatake sees the pale pink pills he tosses the scroll to Iruka with a short warning of,

"Catch sensei."

Then holds his hand open for the pills.

And because Kaito is Not an idiot he tosses them to the man and then grabs Iruka's wrist and starts running as fast as he can toward Konoha.

He is so done with this mission.

            ***

Kakashi watches the two chunin disappear into the distance with an eyebrow raised.

Was he really that scary?

Oh well, he'd send the pack to make sure they got back into Konoha safely.

At least he got Akimichi food pills out of the ordeal.

But what was he supposed to do with the Rock ninja?

Chapter Text

Chapter 49

Naruto's heading home from the training grounds when he sees a familiar person walking down the street.

"SUKEA-SAN!" he greets loudly and nearly tackles the man before he remembers Sakura's lecture on civilian vs ninja behavior.

He skids to a stop right in front of the man who gives him that easy smile that Naruto never gets tired of seeing and a warm greeting.

"Hello Naruto, what are you up to today?"

"I've been tree climbing believe it!"

"Really? It sounds like you’re enjoying it a lot more now that you've gotten a new sensei."

"uh-huh. Kakashi-sensei's way better than that jerk Hiato."

"That's good to hear. Oh speaking of ninja stuff I have some cool ninja pictures for your team to look at tomorrow if you want."

"Cool Ninja pictures?! That sounds great wait til I tell Sakura and Sasuke! Can I see them now?"

"hahaha why don’t you wait on your team ok? I promise they're not going anywhere."

"Aww man but I wanna seeeeeee."

"How about I buy you ramen instead ok?"

"YAY RAMEN!!"

Naruto grabs Sukea's hand and makes sure to gently start dragging the laughing man toward Ichiruka's.

 Today is turning out to be a great day.

First, he finished the book Kakashi-sensei gave him, then he got to train with his team, and now he's going to eat his favorite food with one his favorite people.

He chants all the way to Ichiraku's where he barges in and sets on the stool loudly telling Ichiraku and Ayame his and Sukea's orders. Making sure to tell them extra eggplant for Sukea.

As his first bowl is placed in front of him another good thing happens that day.

"Ah Naruto-kun Sukea-san it's good to see you." Iruka sensei greets from behind him and Naruto decides to leap off his stool to give his favorite teacher (besides Kakashi-sensei of course) a hug tackle. Arms immediately wrap around him and Naruto feels warmth fill him at the return hug.

"Iruka Sensei!"

"Wha be careful Naruto. You almost knocked Sukea-san off his stool." Iruka-sensei warns and there’s a strange look in the teachers eyes for a second but it falls away at the light scolding.

"oh opps sorry." He turns around immediately and apologizes to the civilian like Sakura taught him to do. Sukea just laughs and greets Iruka-sensei before going back to his ramen. Naruto hops back onto his stool as the two men start talking.

Yeah, today was the best day ever!

Chapter Text

Chap 50

Sasuke lays on the training ground as he waits for his teammates to arrive. He had a two hour training session with Might Gai this morning and he's not planning to move again until he absolutely has too.

Stupid 'nice guy' poses and un-freakin- breakable genjutsu backgrounds, and stupid 'youth'!

Sasuke is pulled out of his internal rant when he hears Naruto's voice drawing closer. He manages to turn his head to see the blonde talking to the photographer from a week ago.

Why was Naruto brining a civilian to the training grounds? Ugh this is why he calls the other boy a dobe.

"Hey Teme, guess what! Sukea's got some ninja pictures for us to look at believe it!"

Sasuke would grumble at the blonde but that would require way more energy than he's currently able to muster.

Naruto continues to run his mouth but Sasuke's stops paying attention, it's too much work right now.

Suddenly there's a finger poking at his cheek and Naruto stands over him with a pout on his face.

"Hey, Are you even listening to me?"

"Hn."

"Teme!"

Before Sasuke can decide if it's worth it to try moving Sakura's voice comes across the training ground.

"Sasuke, Naruto, oh Hello Sukea-san I didn’t know you were back in the village." she greets them all.

"Hello there Sakura-chan. I just got back yesterday and had some pictures to show all of you." The man responds back.

Sasuke remains on the ground and thoroughly uninterested as his teammates crowd around the man when he pulls them out of his bag.

There's a noise from Naruto and a small gasp from Sakura that has his attention focused on his teammates again.

"Sasuke, you're going to want to see this." Sakura says just below her usual volume without looking away from the first picture.

Sasuke frowns at them but the dobe's gone quiet and Sakura's still not looking at him. This behavior startles Sasuke enough that he musters up the energy to raise, walk over, and look over Naruto's shoulder at the picture.

The picture of Kakashi-sensei eye-smiling at them.

Chapter Text

Chap 51

Kakashi tries so hard not to snicker at the looks on his genin's faces as they look through the stack of specially made pictures that is his undisguised clone-self going through different sets of a Kata and hand signs for a few beginner jutsu.

"..how?" Sasuke eventually manages to ask after Sakura points out the numbers at the bottom of each photo and find the order the poses are supposed to go.

Sukea just shrugs at his question and gives the Uchiha a sweet innocent smile.

"Would you guys be interested in keeping these pictures?" he asks and laughs when Naruto immediately yells 'yes' and Sasuke jerks back rubbing his newly abused ear drum.

Ah how he's missed his team.

Now to see if they'll take the pictures to the Hokage or actually use them.

To his surprise Sakura is the one who takes charge, telling the boys that they'll practice with them now, just to get the basic forms and signs down and then they have to tell the Hokage.

"What? Why do we have to tell Jiji?" Naruto asks but Sasuke looks close to agreeing with the blonde. (ah isn't it nice to see the team bonding.)

"Because he's going to figure out eventually, we aren't good enough to hide them yet, especially with how the Hokage has been watching us lately." Sakura reasons to the boys and both begrudgingly concede to her judgement.

Kakashi feels pride swell in his chest as he watches all three take turns looking at the pictures and copying the poses, correcting each other when they see something wrong. And if Sukea points out a few mistakes of his own, well, he was there to take the pictures of course he'd know what the next move is. 

While the kids are practicing Kakashi lays a few timed seals on the three training posts and sets them to release at various times. He can't wait to see what reaction it will get from the Hokage and the council, after all some of it will be very incrementing evidence against a certain councilor.

Hmmm Maybe he should raid another Root base before he leaves…after all Sai was also part of Team 7.

Chapter Text

Chap 52

Sukea is gone from Konoha by that afternoon and Kakashi finds himself already longing to head back.

Sukea is bound to be arrested the second he steps into Konoha again and the identity is about to be thoroughly investigated.

Not that they’ll find anything out of the ordinary but now the photographer will be on Konohas watch list. However, Kakashi knew the risks when he decided to make the photos for his genin. (His Genin, it feels so good to say it.)

Kakashi is drawn out of his thoughts by the heavy sent of blood on the air. Curious, he turns to hunt down its source.

It takes him no time at all to find a young Konoha Konichi leaning against a tree with a large wound in her side and several smaller ones running all over her body.

She is breathing heavily and her face is flushed red with fever, she doesn’t even react as he begins slowly approaching her from a distance.

He is nearly within striking distance of her when the woman’s head finally tilts up.

Her face is lined with wounds, including one that cuts from the edge of her left eyebrow, across her nose, threw her lip, over her chin and past the right side of her throat. Another cuts just below her closed left eye nearly bisecting her face all the way through her right ear. The last is simple downward strike, slashing on the far back of her left cheek.

The wound looks to be bleeding sluggishly and a green puss is forming over her left eye. But then her right eye blurrily focuses on Kakashi’s headband and relief slips into her whole being.

“I made it home.” She whispers and then her only open eye rolls back in her head and Kakashi has to move fast to catch her before she hits the ground.

That’s when Kakashi realizes this woman didn’t see the slash in his head band, didn’t realize who he was, and didn’t realize she was not actually safely home.

He also realizes that the woman is far more injured than he first thought, must have been running on fumes and determination, and only wanted to get home.

Well, Kakashi can relate to that.

Chapter Text

Chap 53

Yami Inzuku is patrolling behind his Anbu Mask when a familiar scent tickles his nose.

He halts immediately and his team follows suit. The last time Yami caught this scent it had been left on three rescued genin. It is the scent of one Hatake Kakashi, and it is far too close to Konoha for his liking.

With a few hand signs he orders his team to stay alert and tells them there is a possible S-rank hostile nearby.

They all immediately fall into formation B and alter their course for the source of the sent.

The air is also heavy with the metallic smell of blood….lots of it.

With any luck the blood will be Hatake’s, but Yami’s not holding out to much hope for that. He’s lucks never been that good after all.

Bat is the first to spot something amiss.

That something being a pug wearing a blue vest with a very familiar Hemohemoheji scribbled on it’s back.

Surprisingly the dog doesn’t charge them, or bark an alert.

Instead it trots along a branch and stops a respectable six feet away before raising a paw in greeting.

“Yo. Do you have a medic on your team?” he asks and Yami has half a mind to throw a jutsu at the pug for even thinking that they would willingly help out a MISSING nin.

But it’s a good thing Yami has his impulses under control because the next sentence out of his mouth has Yami’s reconsidering that thought.

“Boss found a konoha Konoichi trying to get home. She’s not in good shape.”

Rabbit steps forward with caution and the pug gives her a once over before turning and walking away. Yami gives Rabbit the signal to follow while the rest of them fall into a half circle behind her.

He’s prepared for a trap but something in his gut says ‘no’ and Yami’s gut is rarely wrong.

When they finally come across Hatake he’s kneeling over the body of a konochi, her headband is from konoha but Yami would be hard pressed to identify her with more than half her face wrapped in bandages.

Hatake doesn’t even bother looking up at their arrival instead he seems to be focused on a wound in the konichis side. His hands are wrapped in pale green chakara and Yami wonders when Hatake learned medical jutsu.

The man only acknowledges Rabbit when she kneels down beside him and starts taking over. Her own medic jutsu a far brighter green than Hatake’s had been.

“I found her three hours ago on her way home. She passed out shortly later, I have no name or rank but I believe her to be mid-chunin. Her face has the most damage but the wounds on her stomach and back are what's killing her. I extracted the poison from her wounds then bandaged them with the salve I have on hand. It’s not the best but it should stop infection. I’ve been working on her stomach but my medic skills are mediocre at best so instead of trying to close the wound I was trying to keep any infection down and remove any remaining poison.”

Yami blinks a few times at all the information tumbling out of the copy-nin’s mouth and wonders when the man got this chatty. Then he sees the bandages and salves near Hatake’s hip and realizes that a missing-nin used his own valuable supplies on a Konoha shinobi.

He’s not sure what to think of that for a moment.

Then he remembers his rookie days as an Anbu and a FUBAR mission in Kiri when Captain Hound gave him his own food bar instead of eating it himself.

The memory is still not gonna stop Yami from apprehending Hatake……or at least trying.

Chapter Text

Chap 54

Yami waits until Hatake is just far enough away from Rabbit and her patient to get a body in-between them before he leaps into action.

A quick body flicker puts him directly in front of Kakashi were he strikes out with a kunai to the man’s shoulder (he would have aimed at the throat but he doesn’t want him dead yet, just apprehended)

Kakashi of course just bends over backwards to avoid it and Yami finds himself dodging a foot to his face. The other Anbu take their cue from Yami and start trying to apprehend the famed Copy-nin.

It does Not go as planned.

First off Hatake is former Anbu himself so he knows everything they know (formation, hand signs, weapons, weaknesses, you name it).

Second he was also an Anbu Captain and has the strength and intelligence to back that up. (He was the best dang Captain Yami ever had that’s for sure.)

Third…..the man is way more powerful that he remembers and seems to quite literally be dancing around their attacks. (Where in the Sage’s name did Hatake find time to train when he was on the run?!)

At some point Kakashi makes a shadow clone, not to help him fight against them, but to correct Badger’s sword stance, and tell Falcon his chakra flow is getting interrupted and he should get that looked at, and ask Rabbit how the patient is doing of all things.

Yami wonders if Hatake lost his mind along with his memory.

******

Kakashi barely manages to dodge Yami’s next attack of an earth jutsu, before switching places with a convenient log and then sliding through Badgers legs (hey he told the man to correct his stance, not his fault if the man didn’t listen.)

He’s trying to come up with an escape plan that doesn’t involve killing or maiming his fellow Anbu. His clone has been distracting them pretty well so far and the pack is making sure that the fighting stays away from the injured chunnin, but he’s not sure how much longer he can keep this up.

He needs a distraction.

Luckily his clone is thinking the same thing.

With a swift body flicker, it folds it’s fingers and takes aim.

Then shouts, “A THOUSAND YEARS OF DEATH”, before hitting Badger right in his posterior. (What? The guy had to learn to correct his stance somehow.)

As everyone quietly stares in disbelief at his clone and their poor incapacitated teammate Kakashi slips behind a tree and activates Kamui. Dismissing the pack as he too disappears into another dimension.

Chapter Text

Chap 55

The Hokage rubs his temples as he stares at the mess of reports on his desk all connected to one Hatake Kakashi.

First there’s the resent reports from there spy in Suna about a kidnapping concerning Rasa’s children. The spy says there was no major fight and no one was harmed, but the Suna Anbu are on edge. The Kazekage’s children however seem perfectly fine and even happy about the whole encounter.

Hiruzen may not believe the last part, except he has three children who would also be perfectly happy being kidnapped by the same missing nin.

Really what is it with children and this man?

The next reports is from two chunin returning from a C-rank scroll retrieval mission. That was a headache all by itself with Iruka involved. Kaito at least belonged to the Yamanaka and could be send to his clan head for answers. Iruka however came straight to him. Answering the questions about Minato had been hard….Answering the questions about Naruto had been harder.

Calming the Chunin down afterward had been near impossible.

And lastly followed the reports from an Anbu team who encountered his current migraine on patrol.

Apparently Hatake had learned Medical jutsu, and an …interesting technic. Poor Badger wouldn’t be able to sit straight for a week. (The poor boy might as well have died a thousand times from embarrassment during the report alone.)

On another note the head trauma theory is looking more likely. The fact that Kakashi has helped out not only a vulnerable genin team but also an injured chunin seems to speak of continued loyalty to the village….on the other hand he still attacked Raido, Genma and Aoba.

On the other, other hand he was attacked first and had been hired to protect the caravan.

He’s also been assisting sand nin and sneaking around the village unseen.

But it’s to talk to his genin….who really shouldn’t be his genin.

Hiruzen gives up on figuring out the missing nin for the day and debates adding something stronger to his pipe.

******

Iruka walks away from the ramen stand with a sigh, he was hoping to catch Naruto again today but it seems the boy was busy.

After the encounter with Hatake Iruka was feeling rather protective of the boy, and that was before the Hokage confirmed that Naruto was the son of Minato Namikaze … Kakashi Hatake’s jonin teacher.

Seeing the boy yesterday after the revelation had been a bit jarring, but then he realized that Naruto was the same boy he’d always been, it was just Iruka’s view of him that had changed.

“Iruka-sensei?” A familiar voice called to him, as he turned the corner to the market.

“Ah Sakura, what are you up to today?”

“Well, I was wondering if you have a moment to help me with something sensei?”

Iruka blinked, it wasn’t often his students came to him for help after they were out of the academy but then Iruka realized she probably didn’t have anyone else to ask right now.

“Of course Sakura what is it?” hopefully it had nothing to do with a certain missing ninja.

“Do you know of any scrolls or books to recommend for learning diplomacy?”

Chapter Text

Chap 56

Hanami smiles at the red head as he gently takes the food she offers him, before swiftly walking over to his siblings and sharing his new treat. She can’t help but give an internal squeal at the sight. Baki’s little genin team was just simply adorable.

They’re also super helpful. She’s pretty sure Kakashi’s been teaching them whatever secret babysitting technic he has, because all four are wonderful at distraction the children and still creating a guard perimeter.

She’d been extremely wary when her father hired the missing nin a few months back, but now she can’t help but thank the sage for the man entering their lives. Hatake had been a kami send when it came to taking care of the children for a few hours during the day. He’d practically earned his paycheck in babysitting alone as far as she was concerned. Of course he ran off the occasional bandit, usually with a quick ninja trick and a smile, but then…..

Then the man fought of three, THREE, Konoha ninja, all of whom seemed very high rank to her. He didn’t even ask for extra payment and well Hanami couldn’t help but want to take care of him after that.

So she’d help make him a travel pack that could hopefully take on a little wear and tear for a few years, and shoved some dried meat inside for him to find later.

She’d seen him eating those weird ninja bars, and she didn’t care how good they tasted there was no way those things could be that healthy.

So the next time he helped out their caravan, and brought along a skittish sand ninja to boot….well she just couldn’t resist feeding them. Not that she was the only one of course, but she practically led the charge when it came to getting some meat on that scarecrows bones. Now here she is again, feeding Baki and his adorable genin and it’s become very plain to her that Ninja do not know how to take care of themselves. So she’ll just have to help them were she can.

Maybe she should let Kimiko from the Sun Caravan know too, just in case.

(This chapter was inspired by a comment from Acornm, thank you for the inspiration)

Chapter Text

Chap 57

Kakashi comes out of Kamui along the Sand border, quickly pulling down his headband but shuffles a little in surprise when the usual dizziness doesn’t immediately follow. He is distracted from his thoughts when he sees a familiar Caravan on the horizon. Instead of going out to greet them, he settles down under a scraggly looking tree to wait for their approach.

To his slight surprise he notices that the caravan is being escorted by Baki and the sand siblings. Which gives him the perfect opportunity to catch up with his other student (students? He has been teaching Temari and Kankuro but does it count if they don’t call him sensei?).

Temari is of course the first to spot him, even with a tiny toddler at her back she’s still keeping a sharp eye out. Good girl.

Gaara’s next and for a second Kakashi thinks he’s about to walk away from the caravan just for a head pat. But then he stops and looks back before resuming his pace, though is it just Kakashi or does the red head look like he’s pouting about that?

Kankuro is the last to spot him, though not by much, and Kakashi decides to give him a little leeway after realizing that Kankuro is using his puppets to entertain the children. (and corral them close together it seems)

Baki, the sly man is obviously notifying Takashi and the women of his presence. Both wave in his direction and Kakashi returns it in kind as the caravan slowly but surely makes it’s way across the sands.

It’s not long later when Kakashi finds himself surrounded by children as he pats Gaara’s red head in greeting.

“Will you be joining us for the rest of our journey Kakashi-sama?” Takashi asks as two women try to give him plates of food. He’s not sure why they think he needs feeding but he is tired of ration bars.

“Maa only if it’s alright with Baki-san and his team.” He says turning to the man in question who looks on with an amused expression on his face.

“We’d be happy to have you along Kakashi-san.” Baki replies and the children cheer in joy.

An hour later Kakashi finds himself in the familiar position of once again being a walking human jungle gym.

Chapter Text

Chap 58

Tamari adjusts the toddler on her back so that her fan strap stops digging into her shoulder but supports her passenger and still keeps her hands free. A few feet in front of her Kakashi-san has taken point. She’s not sure how he manages to carry six kids and strolls along like they all weigh nothing, but he pulls it off with enviable ease.

If you had told Temari three months ago that she would be happy to take a mission with her baby brother and a Konoha missing nin, she would have sent you to T and I faster than you could say ‘Bijuu’.

But now, well, now she can’t imagine not trusting her baby brother and her semi sensei to watch her back.

In the last Month Temari has learned more from Kakashi-sama than any other teacher she’s ever known. Everything from the best way to barter in Rock, to 156 uses for ninja wire, and yes she keep count. The man is a fountain of information and is so willing to share its mind boggling. True, he won’t tell any of Konoha’s secrets, but she still knows the best place in leaf to get good ramen is apparently a place called Ichirukas. She knows that the memorial is a place that Kakashi holds sacred and the names he looks for on it. She knows of the book store in the red lights district that’s run by a retired ninja who’s missing a leg. She knows to stay away from a man named Danzo Shimura who wears bandages on his left side …and she knows that for all the leaf is apparently a bright place, it still has it’s dark side.

But she also knows that despite the dark side her semi sensei still misses his home.

He’s talked enough with her about the leaf village that she could probably tell you exactly what it looks like form the top of the Hokage Monument, and she’s never so much as seen a picture of that view.

Tamari of course had countered all that with her own descriptions of Suna and how wonderful her village is. From its beautiful golden sand, to the Theater that Kankuro spends near seventy percent of his time at. From the civilians with humor as dry as the desert they live in, to the sweet crunch of roasted scorpion at the festivals. From the unique architecture, to the soothing wind she flies on. Suna was one of the greatest places in the world and Tamari adored tell about all of it’s wonderful glory.

It made her realize just how much she truly does love her home.

Maybe even as much as Kakashi-san loves his.  

Before Temari’s thoughts can take too deep of a dive down that path, Meji-chan tugs gently on her collar.

“Temari-nee-chan?” the shy little girl asks in such a soft voice she barely manages to hear it.

“Yes Meji-chan?” she asks back, but the girl simply keeps tugging on her collar until Temari cranks her head around.

At first she’s not sure what Meji wants, but then she notices the little girls hair. Or to be more specific she notices the four lopsided ponytails that now decorate the little girls head.

Temari can’t help but coo at the sight.

How come Gaara and Kankuro were never this cute?

Chapter Text

Chap 59

Hiruzen stares at the pictures on his desk with no comprehension.

There are pictures of Kakashi Hatake in front of him and Hiruzen feels more apprehension seeing them than a war message from Kumo.

A shift from Naruto has him looking up to see the genin staring at him with various expressions of curiosity and sadness.

When he’d heard that team seven, as they are now known, had come to report about their -ehem- sensei he was expecting them to have at least talked to the man ….

He was not expecting to see a thick stack of photos showing the missing nin giving step by step instructions for two Katas and three low level jutsu’s.

This made no sense….None!

And Hiruzen has had to jump around the leaps of logic taken by various clan heads and jonin ninja for over thirty years.

Maybe he should bring this to T and I again.

It may not be professional to toss his problems off to someone else but Hiruzen has enough on his plate and it is his job to delegate anyway.

“Well done team 7. For bringing forth such evidence you will be given the equivalent of a D-rank mission.” He tells the three and watches their faces fall as Hiruzen motions an Anbu to take the pictures away.

“Aww but jiji we wanted those back.” Naruto exclaims, Hiruzen is only slightly surprised when the little Uchiha nods in agreement. However it is young Haruno that truly shocks him.

The pinkeet places a hand on both boys shoulders in what might be comfort or what might be ‘don’t worry I got this’ kind of way. It reminds him of his own genin team back in the day, when Tsunade and Jariya would rally, only to have Orochimaru clam them down and offer a different solution to the problem.

“Pardon me Hokage-sama but may I speak?”

“Of course Haruno-chan.” He replies, curious to what she’ll say. From what he can tell the girl has grown in leaps and bounds recently and it needs to be encouraged. He’s just not sure if the growth is because of her missing nin sensei or some other source all together. No one has paid much attention to the girl before now, even in the academy they only had Iruka who offered a bit of insight to her personality and probable motives.

“Thank you. Hokage-sama team 7 currently has no village assigned sensei right now and our main source of information is, umm problematic.” That’s one way of putting it, the Hokage thinks as the girl continues.

“At the current pace team 7 will fall behind our peers at an alarming rate and if no actions are taken we will become more depended on Kakashi-sensei for help. Is the village, or yourself, not willing to come up with measures to prevent that?”

She asks and Hiruzen has to sit there for a moment and wonder where a thirteen year old child managed to find such a diplomatic way of saying ‘help us or we’ll go to the missing nin.’

With a puff of his pipe Hiruzen concedes, because the girl is correct, if the village doesn’t try to help the children how do they expect the children to stay loyal?

“Very well Haruno-san, your point is well made. Team 7 will be given a village assigned sensei by the end of the week.” He concedes, the boys don’t look happy about it but Haruno gives him a dainty smile and bows before dragging her team mates after her out of the room.

Now, what poor sucker can he place with them that a) won’t tick off the missing nin enough that he might kill them b) might be able to guess the missing nin motives c) might have a chance of standing up to the missing nin in a fight and d) can do some form of child wrangling?

Well, yet another thing he can assign to someone else.

Chapter Text

Chap 60

Sakura takes a deep breath when she finally gets her team to the training grounds and lets all her fear and tension go.

On some level she still can’t believe she spoke out like that. But on another level she cant believe the Hokage actually listened.

She’s sure that when she’s back home in her room she’ll have a short panic attack because of her behavior and inner will smack her out of it. It happened last time when she was stalling with the library scroll. She honestly didn’t think that her missing nin sensei had actually filled out the paper work for it. She was just trying to buy time so she could finish her paragraph.

Then Naruto and Sasuke followed her lead and…well, that’s when she realized something important.

Her boys don’t know how to talk to people. Sasuke’s main word is ‘hn’ and Naruto just thinks that if he’s loud enough people will pay attention to him. So that leaves Sakura to be diplomatic.

It’s why she started studying scrolls about diplomacy, and the art of compromise, and a dozen other things that involve saying the right words at the right time to get the most you can out of any given situation. Granted she didn’t think that Iruka- sensei was expecting her to use his borrowed scrolls to verbally hip check the Hokage….great sage she’d practically threatened the Hokage! What in the Hell was she thinking!

She’s a dead woman! She’s gonna get dragged off to T&I! She’s –

Her internal panic attack is stopped, not by inner as expected, but by Naruto loudly stating,

“Why would you do that Sakura-chan? I thought you liked Kakashi-sensei? Why would you replace him?”

“I’m not trying to get Kakashi-sensei replaced, I’m trying to get us caught up to everyone else we graduated with.” She answers and see’s both boys faces scrunch up in confusion, Naruto’s far more than Sasuke’s at the moment.

“Did you know that Ino-chan learned a D-rank earth jutsu three weeks after we were assigned sensei?”  she asks them and when both shake their head ‘no’ she continues.

“I’d bet that the tracker team also learned something similar sometime after they were assigned a teacher too. But we weren’t. Haizaki didn’t even teach it to Sasuke and he spent the most time training him.” the boys nod at this and Sasuke’s eyebrows go up, Sakura can visibly see the Uchiha connecting the dots in his head.

“Haizaki didn’t train us, not well anyway, because he wanted us unable to fight back when he sold us to Kumo.” He states and Naruto looks wide eyed at them both.

“Yes,” Sakura confirms before explaining further.

“Which means that thanks to him we are now behind everyone else, and without having a village assigned sensei there’s no way for us to catch up. As amazing as Kakashi-sensei is even he can’t train us as many hours as necessary without getting chased by the ANBU. So the village has to either assign us a sensei now, one that will hopefully be able to teach us well, or leave us to be abandoned and hope we don’t go look for the missing nin to get help.”

“Wow Sakura-chan you’re super smart!” Naruto exclaims and while it’s not usually hard to impress the blond it’s another thing when Sasuke nods his head in agreement.

She wonders if Kakashi-sensei would give her one of those nice head pats if he knew about this.

Chapter Text

Chap 61

Kakashi is teaching Gaara and his sibling the art of chakra suppression when something pings his awareness. He’s on his feet and sending a sharp whistle for his pack before he even registers that there are three aggressive chakra signatures coming in fast from just ahead of them.

“Guard formation!” he barks out and takes half a second to be proud of the sand sibling when they immediately follow orders and jump into the correct position with no further prompting.

It’s only after Baki has secured his own position that something about the signatures catches Kakashi’s attention….they’re familiar.

When the approaching ninja come into view Kakashi can’t help but put his hands on his hips and greet them with a,

“Maa, just what do the three of you think you’re doing?” in his best imitation of Tsunade catching someone trying to steal one of her sake bottles.

It must be a pretty good imitation because Nana, Maki and Tsuna all freeze up like they’ve suddenly been frozen in ice.

The silence prevails for a moment before Baki asks in an almost exasperated voice, “Do you know these ninja Kakashi-san?”

“Yes I do, we had this lovely camp out a few weeks back. We traded some information, shared a few stories and killed an assassin together. Tho there group was a little bigger then.” Kakashi shares giving the three frozen a once over and then looking around as if he’ll spot the others in the scarce vegetation.

He knows there not there just by his chakra scene but putting on a show never hurt.

Baki also gives them a once over, before turning to Kakashi with a face full of resigned exasperation.

“Should I tell Takashi-san that we’ll be having guests for supper?” he asks and the three ninja unfreeze only to make bewildered faces in their direction.

Kakashi just eye smiles and gives an affirmative.

Look at his fellow sensei reaching out to other missing nin in friendship. It’s almost enough to make a tear come to his eye.

When Baki turns back to the caravan, Kakashi puts his hands in his pockets and ambles toward his fellow missing nin, to invite them to dinner. He’s pretty sure it’s been a while since any of them had any home cooked food that they didn’t catch themselves.

Plus he really does want to hear the rest of Nana’s story, it’s been bugging him for weeks.

Chapter Text

Chap 62

Maki discreetly pinches himself for the third time since he’s seen Kakashi Hatake defending the caravan they were going to attack. But it still hurts like it did the first two times he did it, and the nice lady is still standing in front of him, offering him seconds of the lovely stew they’re having for supper.

He thanks the sweet angel and pinches himself a fourth time…..ouch.

Ok maybe he should stop trying to break the genjutsu, whoever cast it is clearly s-ranked, and clearly out of his league.

******

Temari passes the plate of bread rolls to Kankuro and steadily makes her way over to the group of missing nin.

Baki-sensei and Kakashi-sensei had brought them back to camp and said they’d be joining them for supper. Temari was wary at first but then the three looked so overwhelmed and now she just thinks it’s kind of funny. Especially when she catches the pretty purple haired man pinching himself.

Kakashi-sensei sees her coming and waves her to a spot on his left, Gaara already taking up the space on his right.

“Maa looks like another of my cute little genin has come to join us.” He says and Temari can’t help the way she perks up at him claiming her as one of his.

“Exactly how many genin do you have Hatake-san?” the green haired woman asks as Temari settles down.

“hmm six, counting Kankuro.”is the reply and Temari has to catch herself before she snaps her head up to look at him.

Six? Where are the other three? No, WHO are the other three? And how dare they try taking Her sensei!

“oh? Where are the other three?” the woman asks, and Temari makes a note to turn this woman into an ally, clearly she’s on the same wave length as Temari.

“There in Konoha.” Is Kakashi’s answer and Temari scowls, so does Gaara.

Kakashi-sensei must notice because he chuckles a little and pats them both on the head.

******

Nana watches the genins face scrunch up in annoyance as Hatake pat’s them on the head. She’s pretty sure the annoyance stims from the mention of the other genin and not the head pats, judging by the way it seems to settle them both down.

There’s an interesting dynamic there and if Nana didn’t know just how vicious the copy-nin could be she might poke at it a bit.

As it is she’s sitting by at a camp fire surrounded by civilians who are more than happy to feed her something that isn’t a ration bar and having a lovely conversation with a Suna jonin about poisons. She is far more comfortable and safe than she’s felt in years, she has no plans on ruining that.

She makes a mental note to find out who his other genin are and steer clear of them …and also to get the recipe for the lovely stew.

Chapter Text

 Chap 63

Tenzo reads his new assignment and feels terror grip his heart.

Surely the Hokage gave him the wrong scroll, surly this is a mix up.

There’s no way he’s being assigned as a jonin-sensei!

He doesn’t even know how to take care of himself properly half the time, much less three half grown saplings!

This has got to be a mix up!

.

.

.

It’s not a mix up.

Three hours, a long talk with the Hokage, and a ‘teaching for the socially impaired’ book later Tenzo wants to cry.

But he sucks up his tears, puts on his new Jonin outfit, and goes to meet the team his senpai has claimed. It can’t be any worse than training under the copy-nin…..right?

.

.

.

Tenzo finds the saplings near his senpai’s favorite spot and proceeds to spy on them for the next two evenings.

When he has a mild grasp on their personalities he shows up early to their meeting place with his assignment scroll in hand.

Once all three are there they eye him curiously but before they can ask questions he approaches them and hands the scroll to the little pinkett who’s taken charge.

She opens it and lets the other two read over her shoulder.

“So you’re going to be our village assigned sensei for now?” she asks with an arched brow.

“Yes Haruno-chan-I mean –san.”

“Chan is fine Yamamoto-sensei. Let’s get introductions out of the way and then you can tell us your training plans ok?”

“Of course.”

“Wonderful, My name is Haruno Sakura, I like my team mates and Kakashi-sensei. I dislike traitors and kidnappers. My goals for the future are to be a field-medic.” She replies and then turns to blond who gives his introduction at an entirely to high a volume.

“My name is Naruto Uzumaki, I like ramen and Kakashi-sensei and Iruka-sensei and Sukea-san even if he’s a civilian. I dislike the five minutes it takes to fix ramen and kidnappers and JiJi right now. And I’m gonna be Hokage one day BELIEVE IT!” well, the kid certainly dreams big.

“And when I do I’m gonna-“ the blond continues only to be cut off.

“We know dobe now shut up, it’s my turn.” The other boy says before beginning his introduction.

“My name is Sasuke Uchiha, I like tomatoes, I dislike fangirls and ‘youth’.” The sapling sneers the name in such a way Tenzo can only think of one reason why (or more specifically one person).

“My goal for the future is to bring my clan back to glory.”

Well ok, that’s not what his info packet had said but he supposes it’s not too far from that.

“It’s your turn Yamato-sensei.” Haruno says quietly and Tenzo jumps into action.

“oh umm yes, well, my name is Yamato, I like architecture  and I dislike human experimentation. Ummm my goals for the future are to train the three of you?”

There that should be a good intro right? He can handle this teaching thing.

Chapter Text

Chap 64

Rukia’s staring out her hospital window when a knock comes to her door. Her face is still wrapped up in bandages and she can’t see out of her left eye so she turns her head to see who’s there. The familiar face of Kaito Yamanaka is a relief after the interrogation she received yesterday from his clan head.

It’s not like she had a conversation with the missing nin that was supposedly her rescuer. Really, the only thing she remembers about the whole thing is trying to block out the pain and her wish to get home. There’s a flash of memory involving a konoha Hitai-ate and white hair, maybe the smell of dog but beyond that …nothing.

“I’m so glad to see you up.” Kaito says, flowers in hand as he enters the room.

“It’s good to be up.” She replies back to her old friend.

“What all have I missed?” she asks as he sits a vase of flowers on her night stand to join the others.

Yamanakas and there flowers, she thinks fondly.

“Well, turns out that the missing nin who rescued you also helped out me and Iruka on the way home, but that’s all I’m legally allowed to say on the subject. Though if Iruka brings it up please tell him not to yell at S-rank ninja, please. I think I lost five years off my life from that encounter alone.”

He informs her as he arranges the vases in a way that suits him, there’s probably some deeper meaning behind it all but darn if she knows what it is.

“oh dear poor you.” She mocks him gently and then leans back, fully entertained for the next thirty minutes as Kaito goes on a rant about the dangers of irritating a S-rank threat and the best ways to avoid it.

Really, the guys always been to sensible for his own good.

“So when’s your next mission?” she asks when he’s finally calmed down enough to sit properly in his chair.

“Actually after the last assignment I asked for a break from field work for a while. My Clan head has me doing deskwork at T&I until I get my mental stability back.”

“Mental stability? Who needs that?”

“Those of us who want to stay sane actually.” He sasses back and Rukia can’t help but smile.

She may lose her left eye, her face will never look the same and her right kidney is a goner, BUT!

She’s alive.

She can still be a ninja (after retraining her new lesser vision of course)

And Kaito will be here like always trying to keep both of them sane.

Chapter Text

Chap 65

Kakashi is sitting cozy around the campfire when Nana starts telling Baki and the genin about their last mission.

He’s listening with half an ear when the name ‘Gato’ catches his attention.

That’s when he remembers about Haku and Zabuza ….opps.

To be fair though Haku and Zabuza have been dead for him for over a decade, when he does think of them they fall into the category of ‘gone but not forgotten’.

This does however mean he leaves the caravan sooner than planned to make an unexpected stop at wave

*****

Asuma grits his teeth as he holds off the giant knife the shirtless missing nin calls a sword. His wind blades are the only thing that has keep him from being sliced in two so far. In the corner of his eye he can see the ice dome that Shikamaru and Ino disappeared under shortly into the fight. The mist keeps him from seeing choji but he hopes the kind boy is still guarding the bridge builder. Choji doesn’t really have the heart for battle.

A shift in the air is his only warning before he dodges out of the way of a B-rank wind jutsu. It separates him and his opponent and also disperses most of the clinging mist.

A quick looks shows that Choji did indeed stay with the bridge builder and the dome of ice still stands, Asuma is contemplating an attack on it when something else catches his attention.

“Yo” calls a faintly familiar voice and Asuma feels his heart sink to his stomach as his eyes land on Hatake Kakashi in the flesh. The man is crouched on the edge of the bridge eye in a crest shape and fingers making out a ‘V’. The friendly appearance doesn’t reassure Asuma in the slightest.

The wind user had barely been hanging on against one S-class missing nin and his not-a-hunter-ninja partner, add another S-class missing nin who’s more familiar with Asuma’s style, plus his genin to protect and….well.

Asuma sends a quick prayer to the Shinigami that his students will have the most painless death possible and absently hopes that Anko will give Kurenai his Last Letter. Then he takes a deep breath, centers himself, and prepares to go down fighting.

“Hatake Kakashi the copy-cat ninja.” Zabuza says and it’s only a mild comfort that these two don’t already know each other. With any luck they’ll fight among themselves and give Asuma a chance to escape with his genin.

“Demon of the mist.” Hatake greets back with a jaunty wave of one hand, the other holding a brown cloth sack that’s leaking.

“What do you want?” the shirtless man asks keeping one eye on Hatake and one on Asuma. Asume is doing the same thing of course and hysterically wonders who Hatake was keeping an eye on…being that he only has one eye visible at the moment.

“Well you see a friend of mine was here just a week or so ago and was working for a man named Gato. Guy promised to pay them big time for stopping some bridge or other from being built. Turns out the guy was an old miser and didn’t want to let his money go so hired someone else to get rid of them when the time came to pay up.”

“That’s nice, but I plan to get that money from Gato one way or the other.” Zabuza snaps out.

“I’m afraid it’ll have to be the other.” Hatake says before flipping open the cloth sack. A severed head goes rolling across the ground and Asume joins Zabuza in staring at the smiling man crouched on the rails.

“I left his safe open. Ta” the copy nin says before swirling out of existence. The severed head the only clue that he had been there.

“Haku! We’re leaving!” Zabuza calls and in a swirl of mist the not-hunter-nin is right by his masters side.

“Hai Zabuza-sama.”

And with that the mist- nin disappear almost as easily as Hatake did, leaving Asuma, his genin, and several unconscious bridge workers behind.

“You saved us” the old drunk says in a shaky voice from where he’s crouched behind Choji’s shorter form.

“No Hatake Kakashi did.” He answers back as he goes to check on his remaining two gennin, both of which look like they’ve lost a battle with a porcupine.

…..

Much later as Asuma leaves Wave he will wish he’d never uttered that last sentence. Looking at the freshly named ‘Hatake Bridge’ he sighs wearily, at least his genin are now sufficiently motivated to take their training seriously.

Chapter Text

Chap 66

Tenzo is running the genin through the second set of Kata’s that Kakashi-senpai had sent them when a poof of displaced air at a nearby training post has him jolting into ‘Protect comrades’ mode before he even analyses the threat.

A wall of trees springs up instantly at his command to block the genin from whatever the danger might be. They startle of course and clumsily fall into defensive positions but luckily remain behind the tree-wall….actually there all eyeing the trees with various levels of suspicion.

Oh they probably think that that’s the attack, Tenzo hadn’t shown them his Mokuton yet had he?

On to more dangerous matters.

A quick peek around shows no one, but you could never use just one sense when looking for an opponent, Kakashi-senpai had taught him that well.

After making absolutely sure that there is no other presence in the nearby vicinity Tenzo signals Clear-Suspicious-Me-Check-out to the genin and receives bewildered looks in return before he realizes he’s just signed to them in ANBU.

“umm you three stay behind here ok?” he tells them before rounding the wood fully.

He sees nothing on the training ground….well nothing but a large folder laying by the training post.

Could it be a different assignment?

But that’s not usually how they arrive.

Or does it usually arrive that way for a regular jonin? Tenzo is only use to ANBU and ROOT after all.

With caution he nears the folder and picks it up. Sliding out the first page he gets a look as a familiar symbol and an even more familiar signature before the information he just read catches up to him.

This….this is information about ROOT.

This is information on people in ROOT.

This is information on safe houses ROOT uses.

This is information that should not exist, because ROOT does not exist.

Tenzo is five seconds from a full blown panic attack when a little note attached to the back catches his attention.

“Take this folder to T&I” is written in familiar bad handwriting next to a henohenomoheji.

Tenzo takes half a second to let the genin know that practice is over for the day before he takes off at full speed to the main building.

Tenzo knows what happens when the Hokage gets information first, nothing gets done against the old war hawk, and with a ROOT seal on his tongue he has no way of informing anyone else….or at least he didn’t until now.

Kakashi-senpai had fought to find proof of ROOT’s existence for years, now here it is in Tenzo’s trembling hands. He will not fail to get this to the highest personal he can. He will not fail to spread the information. He will not fail his Senpai again.

He Will Not!

…….

“Hey guys?” Naruto asks staring at the wall of trees that suddenly appeared in the training field.

“Do you think Yamamoto-sensei counts as a sentient plant?”

Chapter Text

Chap 67

Kakashi popped off a clone as he neared the gates of Konoha, letting it take to the trees as he pulled out a brown wig and purple face paint. He’d need back up if this goes south to fast, but in the meantime he’d check up on his genin.

He’d tried timing Sukea’s arrival to the scroll reveal but he didn’t know how fast the kids would be able to get it to T&I, they’d probably be given the run around for a bit before some low level chunin would be given the folder, knowing how the usual paper pushing went.

The plan was to meet them there and ‘pass on a message from the copy-nin’. It would put Sukea’s identity at greater risk but then ‘Kakashi’ would be able to swoop in and save him if anything got too bad.

He had a seal hidden under the layers of purple paint that would alert his clone if the interrogator from T and I did anything more than break fingers.

The plan should be simple enough to follow,…which means it of course starts falling apart shortly after he arrives.

“Ah Sukea-san” Kotetsu calls as he approaches the gate

“Hello Hagane-san, How’s your day going?”

“Better than yours is about to be I’m afraid” the dark haired man says with a weary grin.

“Oh?”

“We have orders to take you to T and I upon your return to the village.” Izumo answers an apologetic look on his face as he steps out from the booth giving his partner a wave an a few short hand signs.

“Ah I guess the pictures I brought last time weren’t well received.” Sukea replies adding a nervous edge to his voice, as they head into the village proper. After all any civilian would be nervous being escorted to t and I. they’re taking the quickest route available for a civilian, which means there heading down the main road through the market and off to the closest t and I building.

“Im sure it’s just a bit of questioning and then your record will be cleared again.” Izumo tries to reassure him, But Sukea’s attention is caught by something else.

Team seven is strolling down the street towards Ichirukas, no papers in sight.

Ah well, so much for that plan.

Chapter Text

Chap 68

Kaito Yamanaka finds himself enjoying his job at T and I far more than he thought he would. He gets up in the mornings in enough time to get some exercise in and even grab a bite to eat. He has his very own desk where he files paperwork and he’s occasionally called to interrogate a civilian who’s doing something a little more shady than normal. He gets out at a respectable time every day and has his choice of almost any restaurant in konoha for supper. Heck he even gets at least seven hours of sleep at night.

He wonders ideally if he can talk his clan head into giving him a more permanent position.  

He can’t do it today, sadly, because they seem to be a little busier than usual, rumor has it that the higher ups came by some new information and anyone with clearance is being pulled to help out. Sure it means more paperwork and a few longer hours but it beats standing beside a shouty comrade while staring down a missing nin any day (looking at you Iruka).

“Hey Kaito, you got a minute?” a familiar voice calls, causing him to look up from decoding the latest chicken scratch someone calls a report.

“Oh Izumo what can I do for you?” he asks the friendly gate guard who looks to be escorting a nervous civilian. Kaito absently wonders what shady thing the poor man could have done to end up here.

“We’ll it turns out that Yuki-san is busy so I was sent to the next available person for the job, which just happens to be you.” Izumo tells him while handing over a folder.

Oh it looks like the civilian was interacting with a missing nin, now that is very sha----

Kaito’s train of thought dissolves as he sees exactly what missing nin the civilian had been in contact with.

Why the heck does the report hold a picture of Hatake Kakashi eye smiling at him?!

Chapter Text

Chap 69

Clone Kakashi watches from the window under a white bone mask as Yamanaka Inochi and every available Intel agent available pick apart the information on Root like a hound on the hunt.

It looks like his original will be given far less attention and a lot easier interrogation than they thought.

So what can he do in the mean time?

Hmmm well his original did want to meet up with the genin.

Maybe he could go in a disguise.

Sukea is out for obvious reasons, and approaching them as an Anbu is a no go. Should he create another civilian identity? What kind? And how would he be able to get close to the genin without it being suspicious?

Kakashi’s finds a secluded spot that’s usually used for on break Anbu and pulls out his latest romance book to read through while he thinks over the idea. This particular novel is one Baki had given him when he left the caravan last time. Apparently it possesses an amusing plot.

An hour or so later Kakashi is half way through the novel and the plot is as good as promised, he’s just gotten to the part were the main female character is going undercover as a geisha when he stops mid sentence and thinks

‘Oh now there’s an idea.’

It’ll still be a little suspicious of course but not in the same way, and really who’s going to look for the face of Kakashi Hatake under a pair of pretty painted lips?

So he goes about finding a nice kimono to borrow from the stash of clothes reserved for spies along with some make up and a cute little decorated fan. The only thing he forgets to grab is a hair ornament, but he’s already half way into his new get up when he realizes this and has no intention of going back. So he fashions a piece out of some wire, two old senbon and the Bells from the teamwork test.

All in all the get up looks ridiculous with his masculine build, even with his more feminine facial features there's no way he’s pulling this off without gaining to much suspicion.

So he decides to pull a trick out of Naruto's bag.

“Sexy no Jutsu!”

Oh…ok the outfit looks a lot better now.

Kakashi can’t decide if he should be proud or freaked out that he finds his female look hot?

He’ll think on that later, right now he has some genin to visit!

Chapter Text

Chap 70

The first thing that Sakura notices about Her is the bright red kimono with it’s many layers and intricate design.

The second thing she notices is that she’s standing at the corner of Naruto’s apartment building.

The third and most important thing she noticed was a pair of very familiar bells that looked to be wrapped with ninja wire and held to a pair of senbon.

She’d know those bells anywhere.

She remembers the chime they made as the swung form Kakashi-sensei’s hip. She remembers the way the light bounced off there dented surface as they flew from her grasp. She remembers the fond way Kakashi-sensei had looked at the pair of old beaten bells with a soft expression upon his face.

So it is because she remembers those exact things so well that she parts from her teammate, who are once again arguing about something or other, to approach the Geisha on the corner.

“Pardon me, Geisha-sama, but where did you get your lovely hair piece?”

“Maa, this old thing? A client gave it to me in exchange for looking after a few things for him?”

“A few things?” Sakura asks trying not to get distracted by the very pretty face that’s no longer covered by a decorative fan.

“A cherry blossom, a fox and a kitten.” Is her reply as red painted lips turn up into a mischievous smile.

………….

Naruto’s not sure who the pretty lady is that Sakura dragged into his apartment but he’s really glad his team mates helped him clean it out last week.

His place has become their meet up spot when they don’t go to the training grounds and even though the place is small it doesn’t feel crowded with his team over.

The pretty lady has taken up the one chair in the room and Naruto is sitting on his couch with Sakura on one side and Sasuke on the other.

Sasuke’s face is doing that little nose wrinkle thing that means he’s confused by something but isn’t going to ask. Which means it’s up to Naruto to do it because his teammate is weirdly shy sometimes.

“Hey Hey so why did you bring her here Sakura-chan? And who is she anyway?”

“Naruto don’t you just love her hair piece?” Sakura asks him instead of answering which is kind of rude (and Naruto would know Sakura’s been nearly beating manners into them for the past month)

But then Sasuke makes a little ‘hn!’ noise so Naruto looks at the lady who gives a little tilt of her head making the bells in her hair chime-

Wait a minute! Naruto knows that sound!

“HEY THOSE AR—“

Naruto is cut off by two hands covering his mouth, one from each teammate.

Oh this must be one of those things he’s not supposed to talk about. It’s so hard to keep up with the things he is and isn’t allowed to say.

“Did your client give you anything to pass on to the things you’re supposed to be looking after?” Sakura asks the lady and the question doesn’t make sense to Naruto but Sakura obviously knows what she’s doing.

“Maa no nothing to pass on, but he did show me how to make cool shadow puppets. Would you like to see?” She asks with a smile that makes her glow.

“Y-yes please” Sakura answers and Naruto has to blink a few times to get the hearts out of his vision but he leans forward as the lady starts folding her fingers into shapes.

Huh, those shadow puppets look a lot like hand signs. He’ll ask Sakura if this is something he’s not supposed to talk about later.

Chapter Text

Chap 71

Sukea is heading out of the interrogation room as the sun sets with not a scratch on him and a mild worry for Kaito Yamanaka.

The poor man had been a bit of a mess through the interrogation, not that a real civilian would be able to tell but the young man had a twitch near his eye every time he opened the folder containing information about Kakashi Hatake.

Though the jitteriness could just be from being stuck on desk duty, poor guy probably missing being out in the field.

Kakashi decides to grab some ramen and rent a room for the night. He’ll hunt down his genin in the morning.

After grabbing a bowl of eggplant ramen to go he settles down in his rented room and is about to take a bite when a rush of memories flood through his head.

Well, it seems his shadow clone had fun today.

……

Inoichi stares at the piles of papers, scrolls and files all scattered around his office. He used to be able to see his nice mahogany desk, and his plush visitor chairs, but that was before this morning.

This morning when Yamato barged in with his shiny new jonin vest and a folder full of papers.

Was it really less than twenty hours ago that his world view had turned half on its head?

A knock at his door pulls him away from his wool gathering.

“Enter,” he calls at the familiar pulse of chakra.

Ibiki strides in the room with a new stack of files and Inoichi can’t help but groan. This must be what the Sandaime feels like on a regular basis.

(Inoichi makes a metal note that if anyone ever threatens him with that hat to go missing nin.)

“This is the last of the papers from Yuki and her team.” His interrogation expert announces.

“They were the ones in charge of looking for the discrepancy’s in the supply lines right?”

“Yes, and they found them, among other things.” Ibiki says his face grim as he sets the folders down on the floor next to the overly full visitor’s chair.

Inoichi just heaves a deep sigh and mentally curses the people responsible for all this mess.

Chapter Text

Chapter 72

Danzo holds back a sneeze as he walks through the tower away form the Hokages office.

He makes sure to have his steps slow and a little shaky knowing that the Hokages Anbu will tell Hiruzen just how frail his 'old friend' looks. It's bought him great advantages before, to appear weaker than he really is, to seem almost fragile. Hiruzen is the one who falls for it the most.

But it's not just Hiruzen who was asking questions this time, and the Yamanaka clan head is not as air headed as the blonde would like people to believe. The Yamanaka clan head is now a man looking for answers, and where he goes his clan and two others are sure to follow.

Danzo managed to avoid answering most of the questions by steering them elsewhere and on random tangents, then finally claming failing health to get out of the office, but those cunning blue eyes had watched him the whole way.

Danzo realizes he can now only hold this off for so long. They may soon find out about what he has been building in the shadows .... But no! He will not let that happen, he is Danzo Shimura, the Hidden Hokage who governs the village from the darkness, He is the one who builds Konoha's strength, it is HE who will prevail from this.

After all, the Uchiha once set themselves against him and now look were they are, dwindled down to two members and nothing but weapons upon his arm

..............................................................

Sukea sneezes as he passes the Yamanaka flower shop, the pollen must be getting to him.

With a hum he continues on his way until he sees a familiar bridge with three familiar figures standing on it.

"Well, hello there,." He calls in greeting and relishes the sight of his genin perking up when they look at his way.

"Sukea-san!" Naruto calls loudly and like an over excited puppy runs right up to him. the blonde slows his approach when he's a few feet away and Kakashi picks up the chant of "be gentle with civilians" being muttered under his breath.

His genin are so cute.

Sukea gives a chuckle and then wraps Naruto in a hug, the boy's been touch starved enough. When the hug ends Naruto begins tugging him over to his other teammates who have been watching the scene with half amused half exasperated looks.

"Ah it's good to see you all again." He tells them and sees Sasuke giving him a once over from the corner of his eye.

Looks like the boy is finally taking civilians into account. His kids are growing up so fast.

"You as well Sukea-san. I hope you didn't get in to much trouble for delivering our gift last time." Sakura says with a smile on her face, but her eyes roam over him looking for injury. He ideally wonders if that's because of her current medic training or that she thinks T&I might have taken him for a little 'talk'.

"Not too much trouble Sakura-san. I hope they were helpful to you all." he replies with a smile. Sakura opens her mouth to reply but Naruto beats her to it.

"They were GREAT! Believe it! We learned a lot and Kakashi-sensei was so cool to send those to us. Oh, and you were cool too Sukea-san! But the old man took them away after we showed them to him, which is totally lame! Oh, but Yamato-sensei's been teaching us those moves anyway an-"

"NARUTO!!" Sakura interrupts her teammate giving him a stern look that quells the blonde.

"Yamato-sensei?" Kakashi can't help but ask. 

Surely it must be fate that his little Kohai is once again going to help him teach team 7. 

Chapter Text

Chapter 73

Yamato has been searching for his saplings for an hour when he finally finds them at the ramen shop talking with a vaguely familiar brown haired man.

Yes he’d shown up a little late for training but he wasn’t expecting the kids to be gone. He was only two hours late even, nothing on his senpais half a day record.

As he approaches he hears Naruto’s half mumbled speech as he talks around a mouth full of ramen. He cant understand what the boy is saying but it’s swiftly rectified by Sakura, who tells the boy not to speak with his mouth full, followed by the familiar glare. If Naruto keeps giving her practice with that look it wont take long before Sakura becomes a feared medic nin.

After all Tenzo has seen more terrifying glares inside the hospital than he ever has on a battle field.

He almost feels bad interrupting there meal with the kind looking man but he does have a mission for them and a time limit so they really should be leaving in the next three hours at least.

Sakura sees him coming and a brief look of suspicion passes over her face before she gives a smile in greeting.

“Ah sensei what brings you here?” she says a little loudly probably to catch the attention of her team mates who are busy looking at pictures from either side of the brown haired man.

“Ah we have a mission.” He says easily while looking over at the man sitting with his team. He’s so familiar but Tenzo cant place where he’s from. Something about the eyes and the amused look he’s giving him.

“Oh sensei, this is Sukea-san.” Sakura says and now the suspicious look is back. Oh, but he knows why the guy is familiar now, he’s the photographer that brought pictures of Kakashi-senpai. It was in the file he was given on the team.

Wait, wasn't T&I suppose to have a talk with the man before was allowed to walk freely among the village again?

“…This is where you introduce yourself sensei.” Sakura's dead pan voice cuts into his thoughts and he realizes he’s been staring at the stranger.

Tenzo feels his face heat up at his embarrassment before he manages to stutter out an apology and an introduction.

The saplings are laughing at him. Well, Naruto is laughing, Sasuke is smirking and Sakura has a polite expression on her face, but he can see the amusement in her eyes.

Ugh he is not meant for socializing.

“Ehem, well, umm as I was saying we have a mission and we need to get to it soon so if you all could finish up soon we can head out.” He says politely, only to receive suspicious looks from all three of the genin and a cute smile from Sukea.

“I promise it’s not a D-rank ok.” He’s still getting suspicious looks. Ugh. With a heavy sigh he pulls out ‘Teaching for the socially impaired’ and tries to find out what to do when your genin are suspicious of you for an unknown reason.

It doesn’t help, but it does give the genin time to finish there meal and say goodbye to the photographer so he supposes that’s good enough.

He gives a nod to the man and receives a smile that’s way to amused for his liking.

“Maa good luck Yamato-sensei.” He says.

Why does Tenzo feel like this mission is gonna need all the luck he can get?

Chapter Text

Chapter 74

Kakashi is soaking in the warm of his genin’s presence when he sees Tenzo approaching out of the corner of his eye. He doesn’t give it away of course but he notices the look that passes over Sakura’s face when she sees him.

Hmm what could make his cute little genin so suspicious of his cute little kohai? Maybe that he’s their village assigned sensei and thus is kind of spying on them for the village? Hmm something to figure out later.

When Sakura loudly calls attention to Tenzos approach Sukea turns his head with the boys. Only to find his Kohai looking at him with confusion written across his face.

For a second Kakashi thinks he’s been recognized, then Sakura introduces him and the look is gone, though he’s still being given the once over.

“…this is were you introduce yourself sensei” Sakura’s reprimands in a way that says she’s been correcting way to many manners lately.

It brings back old memories watching his cute kohai blush and sputter. He couldn’t be prouder of his little genin.

He enjoys watching poor Tenzo try to corral the kids for a mission and the slight bribing he does before pulling out a book. And at first Kakashi thinks its an imitation of his own habit but that’s not something this Tenzo would know to copy.

And then he sees the cover.

How come nobody ever gave him a copy of that book? It would have saved him so much stress as a new teacher!

He cant quite keep his amusement to himself as his genin bid him farewell and head off with Tenzo. He also cant stop himself from wishing the man good luck, after all there heading out on a c-rank.

Sukea will give it a day or two and then head out after them if there not back by then.

Chapter Text

Chapter 75

Zabuza reads the coded message from Mei and feels a little lighter, so far the rebellion is going as planned, and if it stays that way there will be a new Kage before the chunin exams.

Who the Kage will be still remains to be seen, no matter what Mai says.

“Zabuza-sama?” Haku asks at his elbow.

“Yeah?”

“Forgive my bluntness but if your going to be seeking the affections of Mei-sama then perhaps you should let Hatake-sama know that you don’t reciprocate his feelings.” The little brat says and Zabuza groans.

Ever since Haku got his hands on that bloody romance novel that was left in Gato's safe he’s been convinced that Hatake has a crush on him, and nothing he’s said has changed the brats mind either.

Zabuza himself hasn’t read the stupid book but Haku has regaled him with the plot at least six times.

So he knows that the female lead is a nobles daughter who's trying to protect what her family has built by doing unsavory things for a short greedy rich guy. He knows that the (apparently very handsome) male lead with long white hair kills the evil short guy, rescues the girl from a horrible death and leaves her with all the riches save the one he was apparently there for. Of course then the plot has them fall in love in the span of a chapter and they spend the last half the book in some civilians fancy version of courtship before finally the sucker sticks a ring on it.

Zabuza may or may not have ripped out the last chapter when Haku started asking him some uncomfortable questions about the human limits and bed room behavior.

Haku’s hidden the book from him ever since.

When he gets his hands on that darn copy-cat ninja though, he’s gonna ring the man’s neck for leaving that book behind.

Crush or no crush.

……………

Tenzo is supervising the genin as they set up the camp sight, occasionally pointing out a few corrections in a gentle tone like the book tells him to, when a familiar feeling of impending doom settles over his shoulders.

A quick look around shows nothing at first but then Tenzo zones in on a tiny brown figure staring at him from the under brush.

“Ah Pakkun.” He greets, because if the pug had gotten this close he’s already lost.

“Yo,” the pug greets back with a paw raised.

The genin all turn to see the dog in a bush at the edge of there camp sight, but instead of panicking or getting angry because their space has been invaded all three faces light up with various degrees of delight.

“Hey you were the talking dog with Kakashi-sensei!” Naruto exclaims and of course they know Kakashi-senpais dogs.

Speaking of Kakashi-senpai, where is-

“Yo” a voice says right in his ear.

Tenzo doesn’t jump, but only because he trained himself not to over the years.

Tenzo's quiet and slightly wary greeting of ‘Kakashi-senpai’ is drowned out by three voices calling “Kakashi-sensei!”

Chapter Text

Chapter 76

Kakashi’s smile under his mask is probably a maniac thing. He pats his kohai on the shoulder as he passes and only receives a long suffering look in return so he figures the other man isn’t mad about how he left in this time line, and the two of them still have an amenable relationship.

Then Naruto slams into him with a ferocious hug and Kakashi can’t help the light happy chuckle as he wraps the genin in his arms. The death grip the blonde has on his waist is nothing like the hugs Sukea gets as a civilian.

Sakura boots Naruto to the side, not detaching the blond but simply making a space for herself beside him. He reaches out an arm and circles her too, then looks up to see a contemplating look on Sasuke's face.

He’s pretty sure the boy won’t ruin his bad boy image by joining in the group hug but Kakashi holds out a hand anyway.

To his surprise the boy actually comes close enough for Kakashi to place the hand on his head.

Hmm so Sasuke likes head pats.

Then Kakashi sees the slightly jealous looks on Naruto and Sakura's faces and corrects the thought to All the genin like head pats.

“So what have the three of you been up to?” he asks and is instantly bombarded with three different voices trying to talk to him at three different volumes.

“Maa maa why don’t we finish setting up camp and then you can tell me all about it.”

This sends the three into a frenzy as they complete their tasks.

“It’s good to see you senpai” Tenzo's voice shakes a little as he comes up beside him, giving the genin a half amused half exasperated expression.

“You as well Kohai.” Kakashi says and on a whim reaches out to pat Tenzo on the head.

At the happy look on Tenzo’s face Kakashi once again corrects his mental statement to, All of team 7 like head pats.

Chapter Text

Chapter 77

“Wait! Does that mean that Yamato-sensei isn’t the sentient plant you want to kill?!” Naruto’s loud question carries across the clearing from were he’s helping Sakura set up a perimeter alarm.

Kakashi blinks at the question.

“Ah, no. Tenzo’s more of a sentient with plant added. The weed I want to kill is named Zetsu and he only looks vaguely human with a fly trap around his head.” He informed his genin who all gave Tenzo one more critical look and then nod in apparent agreement.

“We’ll help you get rid of Zetsu Kakashi-sensei.” Sakura adds with a determined glint in her eyes.

“maa, if you ever do run across him, just set him on fire and run, he’s a little too powerful for you all to take on right now.”

“You say right now, does that mean we can beat him some day?” Naruto asks and Kakashi smiles at them, because he knows just how strong these kids are going to be and Zetsu… Zetsu wont stand a chance against them.

“Of course you will, but that will be some time yet. In the mean time, finish what your doing and then we can go over what you’ve learned in the last couple of months.”

It’s like he said the magic words, all three genin stand a little straighter and then set up camp faster than the average Anbu squad. It’s not perfect, there’s a gap in the perimeter, the traps Sasuke set up aren’t completely covered and the sleep space hasn’t been cleared properly, but they are genin and frankly Kakashi knows a number of Chunin who’ve done a sloppier job.

Besides Kakashi and Tenzo are here, and the pack is keeping guard. If anything try’s to get to his genin…we’ll they wont last long.

Kakashi can’t help the smile on his face as he sits down with his genin and listens to them talk about the past few months.

He’s thanked generously for the gifts he left for them, even by Sasuke. Then he’s told of the talks with the Hokage and Sakura’s stalling plan that turned into much more. They tell him of Sukea’s pictures and how they used them before turning them over to the Hokage before they got in trouble.

Kakashi gives Sakura a head pat and congratulates her with a ‘good girl’ when he hears of how she practically black mailed the Hokage into giving them a village teacher. The girl turns as pink as her hair but soaks up the praise like a sponge.

He gives Sasuke a head pat too when the kid tells him of training twice a week with Might Gai and promises to practice with him in the morning to give him a good idea of how far he’s come.

Naruto tells him of all the things he’s ‘not suppose to talk about’ and how hard it is to remember some times and how Sakura and Sasuke keep him from spilling everything. He tells him of his clean apartment and the flavors at Ichiraku’s and the things Iruka has taught him lately. Oh yeah and how pretty Kakashi's 'friend' is 'I mean like Really pretty Kakashi-sensei, Believe it!' He pats the blondes head while silently panicking because 'His Genin Has A Crush On Him As a Woman HELP!'

And later that night, when the genin have been sent to bed, with a guard rotation planned out, Tenzo sits next to him and tells him in fits and starts about finding the ROOT information packet, his mad dash to T&I and the talk he had with Inoichi.

It takes Kakashi a few minutes to realize the reason Tenzo is stuttering is because the ROOT seal on his tongue is still active.

Kakashi cant do anything about it at the moment but the second he finds some more seal ink and a clean scroll he's going to work on breaking that seal. He may have to kidnap Jaraiya to figure it out, but He's Going To Break That Seal!

In the mean time he reaches out a hand and places it on his Kohai's bowed head.

Yeah, everyone in team 7 likes head pats.

Chapter Text

Chapter 78

Pakkun watches his summoner sit surrounded by his team and realizes that his pup is healing.

It’s taken far too long in Pakkuns opinion, but as the humans say ‘Better late than never’.

Pakkun’s not sure what brought the change on, well, that’s not true, he has some idea.

His pup had summoned him some months back and asked him to lead him back to his current hiding place because he had a concussion. Pakkun hadn’t said a word, just calmly lead his pup back to the dreary cave, savoring the fact that his pup smelled more like confusion and less like depression. The dark sour smell had been clinging to his pup since his old man died, it only got worse as his team (his pack) fell around him one by one.

He’d made a tentative pack in Anbu for a while, with other geniuses and outcast that held the world on there shoulders, but that too had fallen apart. And with it’s failing Kakashi had fallen deeper and deeper. Then he was chased from the only home he’d ever known and Pakkun thought for sure he would loose his pup the same way his pup lost his sire.

Only Pakkun wouldn’t be able to find the body, he’d only feel the thread that attached them snap and know that his pup was gone from this world.

Pakkun doesn’t know what happened before he arrived that day only that his pup smelled of confusion and blood. He’d been so scared to ask if his pup was ok, but even more scared not too.

So he’d forced the words out and expected a ‘fine’ or a grunt or, even worse, a swift dismissal.

But instead his pup had broken down, had finally drained the poison from within himself, and Pakkun had been there. Had curled up in his pups lap like he hadn’t gotten too since his pup lost his teacher. He had been there for his pup like he always had been and always will be if he has anything to say about it.

Now he watches as his pup builds a new pack out of genin from two different nations and dragging a man in from each side to guard them when Kakashi cannot and Pakkun …well Pakkun couldn’t be happier seeing his pup heal.

And anybody who tries to stop his pup from healing had better pray for mercy cause when Pakkun gets a hold of them he’s certainly not going to have any.

Chapter Text

Chapter 79

Apparently team 7's mission is to deliver a time sensitive scroll to a nobleman's household with in a weeks time.

Naturally Kakashi takes this as an opportunity to test his Genins speed....by instigating a game of tag.

Sasuke's the fastest of course but Naruto's trickier and fights a bit dirty, where as Sakura uses her excellent chakra control the her advantage by body flickering ahead and sticking herself to the underside of trees out of easy reach.

It's all going very well until a howl from Bull alerts him to a possible incoming threat. A quick sensory scan confirms that the threat is coming from behind them....coming from konoha.

Seven signatures with chakra that feels oddly 'blank'.

'Blank' in a way that Kakashi hasn't felt since ROOT.

With a quick burst of speed he scoops up Sakura and then Naruto, much to the blondes protest. Tenzo, who's been running point at a slower pace for an Anbu quickly follows his example by grabbing Sasuke up and the two of them poor on the speed.

As they create distance between themselves and the recent threat Kakashi manages to sign Danger-Hurry-Protect-Team.

Tenzo doesn't ask for anything more than that before he gives a sharp nod then pulls his now grumpy genin into a more comfortable position.

“Hey! Kakashi-sensei! What the heck was that for?! I was almost gonna catch Sasuke! Believe it!”

“Sorry Naruto, the game has to be cut short.” he explains as he tries to shift the two in some way so that he can have a hand free to fight with.

Luckily Sakura is a smart girl and begins using her chakara to 'stick' to him, letting him adjust Naruto into a better position.

“Someone is chasing us.” Sakura says, her green eyes narrowed and looking at the road behind them.

“Correct.” He tells her and takes a few seconds to pat her on the head in praise. The pinkeet beams at him as his pack comes rushing up beside them.

“Boss.” Pakkun greets before giving his report.

“Seven hostiles spotted, all with chunnin or above level chakra according to Shiba.” he says before hesitantly adding,

“All of them are wearing blank masks boss.”

Chapter Text

Chapter 80

Kakashi hears the words out of Pakkuns mouth and his first thought is filled with worry, anger, and a little fear.

ROOT is after my team.

His second on the other hand is filled with all consuming protective rage.

THEY CANT HAVE MY PACK!

And with that Kakashi signals Tenzo to find the nearest defensible position, which turns out to be the entrance to a shallow cave.

Kakashi quickly shuffles his genin inside and starts setting up a wire trap. He blinks a bit when Naruto and Sasuke hand him their weapon pouches but he grabs them with a quick hair ruffle and sets up the fastest deadliest thing he can think of.

When he turns back to his genin Sakura is already threading her chakra through the wire just like all those months ago before they knew they were his.

HIS-HIS-HIS!

And NO ONE is going to take them from him! Ever Again!

He gives all three a quick pat on the head because he needs to touch them and the affection seems to calm them down. Then steps outside the trap just as Sakuras chakra finishes filtering through it.

When he faces Tenzo he can see the anger and worry in his stance. He easily falls back into the roll of Anbu captain once again, and folds his fingers into familiar signals.

PROTECT-TEAM-KILL-ENEMY-DETAIN-NOT-PRIORITY

And with that there off toward the blank signatures as the pack creates a protective perimeter around the young genin's hiding place.

Kakashi doesn't bother trying to sneak up on them, instead he goes straight for the leader, Chidori ablaze.

The man is fast enough to dodge the lightning to his heart but still looses a good chunk of his arm in his escape.

Kakashi chases him using a body flicker and adds a clone for good measure. These guys are Dead! They just haven't stopped breathing yet. Something Kakashi plans on fixing very shortly.

A wall of cubed branches springs up to Kakashi's left and he takes half a second to see Tenzo's wood release smash into three of the ROOT nin.

Kakashi lets his clone take on two others while he pulls his head band away from his sharingan. Before he quite realizes what he's doing the leaders head is twisting in space before disappearing completely. The body still takes a few seconds to realize it has no higher command functions before falling over and gushing blood.

Not exactly how Kakashi was thinking the man would go but it was quick and effective so he'll take it.

Kakashi uses the same trick on three more of the opponents who are all growing very wary and increasingly frantic as there comrades heads seem to disappear from existence.

Then he covers the eye before he completely drains himself of chakra.

Tenzo hasn't let Kakashi's new fighting style distract him and has dispatched two of the other Root nin. That leaves only one man still standing.

Chapter Text

Chapter 81

Kakashi is debating if he has enough chakra to channel another chidori when Tenzo's wood release snatches the man from behind and wraps him from tip toes to shoulder blades before flipping him upside down.

The red fades from Kakashi vision as he looks at the ridiculous sight.

“One detained Senpai.” Tenzo says and Kakashi turns to see a happy delighted look on his kohai's face. It reminds him so much of his pups when they want praise that Kakashi blinks and reaches out a hand. He doesn't even have it all the way extended before Tenzos head is under his palm.

“Maa, you did good kohai.” he says, and mentally notes that he should give out head pats more often.

….................

Tenzo basks in the feeling of his Captains approval.

He thinks there might be something wrong with him, to feel such loyalty to this man over his village. But it was Kakashi who got him out of Orochimaru's clutches and then later out of Root.

It was Kakashi who helped him and befriended him and showed him what it was like to be semi-human.

It was Kakashi who tried to reveal Root and was practically exiled for it while the Hokage stood back and did nothing....just like he did nothing when Itachi and Shisui were breaking apart at the seams.

Ok so maybe something isn't wrong with him, maybe something's wrong with konoha.

Tenzo keeps this thought in his head as he watches Kakashi-senpai interrogate the Root nin with liberal use of his sharingan.

He keeps this thought as he watches the man stand up and sway from chakra exhaustion.

He keeps this thought as they reunite with the genin and the ninkin.

He keeps this thought as Kakashi settles down to rest, the three genin surrounding him and doing there best to set up a protective perimeter around there dosing teacher.

He keeps this thought as they complete the mission at a slower pace than before, watching as the three genin soak up Kakashi's attention like plants in the sun.

He keeps this thought as they part ways a day before konoha were Kakashi-senpai places a package in his hands and pats him on the head.

“Don't worry about Root Kohai mine, I'll be taking care of them soon.” His captain says and Tenzo believes him.

And then all thoughts go flying from Tenzos mind as he realizes that the package his senpai gave him is actually a book with two people in scarcely any clothes leaning against each other in a very compromising position.

“S-SE-SENPAIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII!!!!!!”

Chapter Text

Chapter 82

Kakashi is back in Konoha on a mission.

He's getting into Root archives if it kills him.

And with his current chakra levels it just might.

Or at least that's what he thought, but it's only been half a day and about six close calls and he's now in an underground base that looks half abandoned with a filing room that looks like it was organized by a six year old.
No change that, a three year old, a six year old would have at least organized the files by color.

Four hours of mild frustration and no interruptions later Kakashi finds something unexpected among the dust covered stacks of paper and scrolls.
Something unexpected that makes his blood boil and his vision turn red.

Looks like Orochimaru was just following orders when came to his experiments. In fact some of these files are written like the snake might have even been black mailed into some of it.
A few more scrolls later and Kakashi is piecing a puzzle together that he never thought to solve.

It looks like Danzo used Orochimaru's feeling of being abandoned by his team as a base and then pushed them by spreading rumors and sending him on missions with people who were wary or outright scared of him.
Then keeping the Third busy with little things from after the war and suddenly Danzo was the only one he could rely on to be there. The one to give him a purpose after everyone else had supposedly turned their backs on him.

That's when the experiments start.

First on prisoners of war, which isn't uncommon and was probably routine during the war. Then on civilians who wouldn't be missed, like bandits or beggars. It escalates quickly from there to children and even clan kids. All of whom where obtained by Danzo.

The manipulation is familiar to him. After Minatos death it was Danzo who nearly talked Kakashi into killing Hiruzen. Using his feeling of guilt and self destructive tendencies against his teenage self.

It also follows the pattern of the Uchiha fall. But it looks like the Uchiha weren't willing to play by Danzo's rules and were simply taken off the board as a whole.

…....just like Orochimaru and the Kakashi of this time had been taken out of play.

Hmmm

A plan begins to form in Kakashi's mind as he leaves the base behind. He didn't find what he was looking for but this new information certainly creates some interesting opportunities.

But, well, it's not like he'll get a chance to talk to the Snake so there no use thinking .... about .... it.

Oh, hello there Kabuto.

Chapter Text

Chapter 83

Kabuto is walking down the street with his nose stuck in a medic scroll when someone falls into step beside him.

Kabuto takes a glance at them and then does a double take, because the lady strolling next to him has on a deep red kimono that practically drips wealth and a decorative fan that only partially covering her very beautiful and very unfamiliar face.

“umm?” he manages because he has no idea what this lady could want.

“Maa Kabuto-kun, what the matter? Snake got your tongue?” she says and Kabuto quickly blinks the hearts out of his eyes as the words register.

He does a quick stealth look around and decides that while people are looking in their direction (or more accurately at the woman in front of him) no one heard the words she said.

Kabuto is going to kill Orochimaru-sama for sending him a seduction agent as a messenger.

Ok that's a lie, he would never bring himself to harm the man who gave him a home and a purpose after Nana. But he will be petty enough to sent his next report in the worst doctors hand writing he's capable of.

“Sorry, I get lost in my head some times, are you here for a visit? The hidden leaf is wonderful this time of year, the view for the Hokage monument is especially lovely.”

Kabuto manages to get the code phrase out without giving anything away but instead of reciting the counter phrase the woman simply tilts her head and gives a little secretive smile.

“Maa the view is lovely but that's not the reason for my visit, you see I have a message I'd like to pass on to somebody and your just the little spy to do it.” the lady replies her fan over her mouth and amusement dancing in her eyes.

That's....not good. He wonders is she's from Sasori or Root, though both would be ...well, bad.

Kabuto keeps himself relaxed as his sharp eyes give her the once over, she's not caring any weapons except for maybe the fan. Her body language is open and amused, but not sadistic.

So the chances that the message will be his dead body is very low at least, but they do need to take this out of the main street before they draw to much unwanted attention.

“Of course, please follow me.” he says with a smile, he's still playing the part of a happy but shy genin med student after all, best to keep up appearances. 

Chapter Text

Chapter 84

Kakashi is somewhat surprised by how easy Kabuto takes the accusation of being a spy. He was honestly expecting the boy to deny it not lead him to a secluded tea house with a nice back room and sound dampening seals.

“Danzo sent you.” is the first thing out of Kabuto's mouth and Kakashi has to blink in surprise.

“Doesn't Danzo think you're dead?” Kakashi can't help but ask as he tries to arrange the layers of the kimono in a way that's comfortable but also won't wrinkle the fabric to badly. He can already hear Sakura screaming in his ear if she ever finds out about him abusing such fine cloth.

Kabuto blinks at that.

“Sasori then.”

“Not him either.” Kakashi tells him as he delicately pours the provided tea as properly as any true Geisha would. Having his sharingan open that day in Madam Yun's actually came in handy.

“.....Gabachi?”

“Who?”

“I guess not then. So who do you work for then.”

“Hmmm I don't think I'll tell you.”

Kakashi takes great delight in watching Kabuto's eye give the minutest twitch.

“Then who shall I say your message is from?” Kabuto practically says through gritted teeth.

“A one eyed scarecrow.” Kakashi answers and smiles at the almost disbelieving look on the poor boys face.

But then the boy takes a deep breath and composes himself before taking the tiniest sip of tea.

“And what is your message geisha-san?”

“hmm tell the snake that when he invades Konoha he should go after the one who was truly responsible for his exile.” the copy nin responds and then takes a sip of his tea as he watches the little changes in Kabuto's face at the news.

The spy eventually sets the tea down before looking over Kakashi with a very piercing gaze. Kakashi wonders if the boy is planning to kill him and dump the body elsewhere.

“And how would you know about that?” he asks, the previous simi friendly façade gone and instead replaced by a harsh dark tone.

Kakashi knows he's asking about the plans for the invasion but chooses to purposefully misunderstand and instead answers with.

“Danzo put a lot of seals on a lot of tongues, but that doesn't prevent people from talking entirely. Nor does it prevent those who know of 'it' to simply forget its existence.”

“....Your talking about the root seal.”

Kakashi smiles a siren smile and then sticks out his tongue.

He already tested to see if the seal was still there and while it is in place, it's obsolete and useless. A faded design with no power behind it.

He lets Kabuto absorb the information while he takes a few more sips of his tea.

“You escaped.” he eventually says, his gray eyes boring into Kakashi's own.”

“hmmm yes, in a way.”

“the one eyed scarecrow did too I take it?”

“yes.”

“And now you want revenge on Konoha.”

“No not Konoha just Danzo and his power hungry scheming. In fact if your boss decides he's going to take his revenge out on the ignorant and innocent citizens of the leaf then we are going to have a very big problem.”

“ah” is the only thing the young medic has to say.

Chapter Text

Chapter 85

Kakashi practically whistles as he heads out of Konoha. He's found some interesting things about root, had a lovely talk with Kabuto, grabbed some fresh sealing ink, and left a present for the Hokage.

Life is going great.

It gets even better when he spots a familiar figure in a dango shop

“Maa if it isn't Itachi-chan.” Kakashi greets his fellow missing nin with a drawl and a wave.

Itachi doesn't twitch but his eyes do bleed crimson for a second.

Kakashi idly wonders how bad the young mans eye sight is at this point.

“ah Hatake-san.” the Uchiha greets as he places a hand casually inside his cloak. Not the black and red of the Akatsuki robe but a drab gray thing that looks more like what he and Nagato wore during impure resurrection.

“Why so formal Itachi-chan, we use to work together you know.” Kakashi says and points a thumb at his head band. Just in case Itachi didn't see the scratch through his Hitai-ate. When the younger man only nods instead of attacking Kakashi takes a seat across the table from him.

“So how's the missing nin life treating you Itachi-chan?” he asks and watches as Itachi's face gives the smallest of twitches while the teen munches on a dango.

“Better now.”

“oh?”

“Yes i've found a group of individuals who all hold a great amount of power and are willing to fight for a common goal.”

Kakashi has to take a minute and blink at that. He honestly wasn't expecting Itachi to bring up the Akatsuki at all.

Wait! Is this a recruitment speech?

“Thats...nice.” he says and then before Itachi can get any ideas he switches topic.

“Oh by the way I saw your brother recently. He's a bit gloomy and has a mild obsession with training but he gets along with Gai ok.”

Kakashi rattles off and watches as the second Dango freezes on the way to Itachi's mouth.

“.....the council ...gave him.... to Gai?”

“Nope.” Kakashi replies and delights in the fact that Itachi cant seem to wrap his brain around the information of Sasuke willingly spending time with Might Gai.

Kakashi's about to settle in and really start messing with Itachi's head (hey the guy deserved it for all the trauma he put everyone through ok) but a wisp of a familiar chakra signature has him standing up instead.

“Ah well, I left my cat on the stove so I better go fix that.” he says in farewell, just to watch Itachi's face tic, before hightailing it out of there as the familiar signature comes closer.

He is ready for many things but facing Obito is not one of them.

Chapter Text

Chapter 86

Hiruzen looks at team 7, then looks at the report, then looks at Tenzo, then looks at the book Kakashi left with the man, then closes his eyes and takes a deep calming breath.

Because by the Sages Beard! This is more trouble than its worth!

Honestly he's suppose to be retired. He was Retired!

He should really start looking into finding another successor because at this rate he's going to pull all his hair out just dealing with the mess labeled 'Hatake'.

He really wants to yell at Tenzo and ask what he was thinking when he let Kakashi freaken Hatake join them without so much as a word of protest but it's actually written in the report that Tenzo hadn't felt any ill will from the man and was even given tips on how to progress with the genin's training.

Apparently the fact that Hatake didn't try to kidnap the genin or even persuade them away from there current delivery mission was enough for Tenzo to just let the man have free reign.

Not to mention the fact that they were attacked but a group of unknown masked individuals. (Yes Hiruzen can read between the lines on Tenzos report but ROOT is gone, Danzo assured him that Root is done. He doesn't really want to think about that any further.)

Hiruzen isn't sure how Tenzo would have fared against the opponents on his own with three genin to protect but he has a feeling the answer would be 'not good'.

He stifles another sigh and resists the urge to pinch the bridge of his nose.

“Well done team 7, congratulations on the completion of your mission. Dismiss.”

He says with a wave of his hand and the three genin begin babbling excitedly as they head out the door. Something about playing a game of ninja tag?

Meanwhile Tenzo gives him a significant look before following after them at a more sedate pace.

He knows what the look was about but his headache is already big enough without adding Danzo to the list.

With another heaved sigh he sets team 7's reports aside to be filed and then turns to the mountain of paperwork that has gathered on his desk.

Somewhere between a misfiled report about a flower arrangement class at the academy and an in-progress interrogation at T&I Hiruzen stubbles upon a request framed as a petition. It asks for 'Teaching for the Socially impaired” to be mandatory reading for all Jonin-sensei and even has a lovely list of addition that could be added to the book and why said book could be a great improvement to the teaching environment between genin and jonin.

The petition is well written has excellent points and even has Hiruzen about ready to sign the document himself until he sees the signature at the bottom.

He swears the Henohenoheji is laughing at him.

Chapter Text

Chapter 87

Temari is hot, tired, and in desperate need of bath by the time Suna's gates come into view. Forget escorting princess and nobility Temari will take the caravans any day of the week. If her father decides to stick her with another pampered, pompous little--

Her train of thought breaks off when she sees a familiar head of grey hair off in the distance and then she's all out sprinting for the gate.

A second later her brothers are beside her, “Why are we running Temari? I don't see anything.” Kankuro complains even as he fumbles with the catches on his puppet.

It's nice to know that her brothers will take her lead on things even when they don't know what's going on.

“Kakashi-sensei.” is all she says as she points to the gate where the gray haired man is propped up reading some brightly colored book.

A poof of sand beside her has Temari distracted for a second and she realizes that Gaara just used a replacement jutsu to get ahead of her. The little sneak.

She lets it go because she's a gracious older sister and Gaara needs all the affection he can get. But if Konkuro tries to get there before she does she may just take her middle brother out at the knees.

She slides into place beside Gaara and stares up at Kakashi until he gently places his hand on her head. Her' headpat is just as wonderful as always and Kakashi-sensei even cards his fingers between her ponytails before turning to greet Baki whos the last to arrive.

“Maa Baki-san it seems your genin still have some energy so I take it the mission wasn't to hard?”

Temari can feel her lips pull into a snarl, one that Kankuro matches and even Gaara's blank face twist a little into something unhappy.

“Ah the mission....went.” is Baki-sensei's reply and at Kakashi-sensei's raised eyebrow he adds.

“Nobles”

“Ah say no more. Well, how about a reward for all your hard work? I heard there's a restaurant that serves a great fried scorpion tail. My treat.”

Has Temari mentioned that Kakashi is her favorite sensei?

With enthusiastic agreement she grabs Kakashi-sensei's hand and drags him past the increasingly twitchy gate guards and into the village.

If anyone asks why there's a missing nin eating lunch with the Kazekages children Temari will just sick Gaara on them.

Chapter Text

Chapter 88

Kakashi spends a few days in Suna planning out training exercises with Baki and giving out head pats like candy to the sand siblings. Apparently Team 7 aren't the only ones who likes them.

Kakashi even gave Baki one but only received a disturbed look in return. Maybe it doesn't work so well when the person is wearing a head wrap?

He also has fun messing with Suna's ANBU as they are probably assigned to follow him around. He uses this opportunity train his Kamui by slipping into the dimension part way and walking through a few walls. The panic frenzy this sends the Anbu into is highly amusing.

Especially because it causes one Anbu to fall into the trap sent by the siblings. The poor man is given a very disappointed look by Baki who then proceeds to list a few ways the kids could try interrogating the Anbu for information.

The Anbu actually escapes before any interrogating takes place but the kids don't seem to disappointed.

There's only one major bump in the road, and that's when a retired swordsman jumps him in the streets screaming about the White Fang. Luckily he's grabbed up by a sand coffin. Unluckily Kakashi has to stop Gaara before he can crush the man and ends up having a three hour talk about not killing everything you don't like before he'll let the man go.

It goes something like this.

“Yes, he attacked me and yes I'm proud of you for protecting your team and you did an amazing job catching him before he could do any damage. But he is a Suna citizen and is supposed to be under your care and he was attacking a missing nin which is actually a good thing. Plus the guy probably has bad memories of facing my father in battle and may have some PTSD. No it's not a good excuse to attack someone but ...ya know what, would you let him go for a head pat? Thank you Gaara.”

Kakashi has a quick chat with Raza before he leaves about Gaara's behavior, the battle plan for the exams, and the latest novel by Hanabira Iroke. A lovely piece actually, if not quite as good as Ichi Ichi.

Then gives his Suna genin a few small tips and lots of head pats before using Kamui and disappearing before the Anbu can even try to follow him.

All in all Kakashi would say it was a very successful visit.

.....The Kazakage and his Anbu on the other hand have now bumped up the crazy mans threat level. 

Chapter Text

Chapter 89

Orochimaru is in the middle of three separate experiments when an urgent message from Kabuto interrupts him. Orochimaru stabs the messenger but sends them to medical with a wave of his hand. (He didn't kill the man and that's a bit of an improvement...what can he say he's in a good mood today.)

The coded message only takes a minute to solve but Orochimaru reads it three times just to be sure he used the right cipher.

At first he's angry.

Angry that someone would try to change HIS plans to order HIM around. He's one of the Sanin, one of the most terrifying missing nin that Konoha ever made.

But then he's amused.

Danzo was the one who started him down the path of human experimentation, perhaps it will be poetic to turn Danzo into a human experiment himself.

He humms to himself as he sets his current projects aside, one of them was going to be dead in an hour or two anyway. Then he pulls out a fresh scroll and begins writing down what he remembers of the Root Seal he saw placed on many tongues.

….....

Nearly three days later Orochimaru is hissing in anger, sounding more like a nest of vipers than anything human. That seal. That wretched, abominable, Sage forsaken seal.

Orochimaru wants to go back and strangle his past self for willingly allowing this monstrosity to be placed on himself.

He stares at the dark lines that now surround him, written on paper and walls and the floor, and when he ran out of space there, on the ceiling. He looks at the base of the entire things and notes that while the lines there are elegant and smooth, artistic even, the rest of this is a mishmash of styles and techniques that would make even a genin in Uzushio weep in frustration and horror.

Why had he never examined this thing beyond the base?

It's a disaster. The fact that it works to keep anyone from speaking about Root actually seems to be a side effect of the jumbles mess rather than a main purpose. In fact the main purpose of the seal seems to be a form of mind control. Admittedly one that seems to be mostly useless because of all the terrible choppy bits.

At least when Orochimaru makes something horrifying it's meant to be that way. This looks like someone took bits of different puzzle that are in no way related and decided to make a new picture out of them....while drunker than Tsunade on a bender.

Chapter Text

Chapter 90

Orochimaru is still hissing over the root seal when a report comes from Suna. This messenger is smart enough to dodge.

At first the report makes little since with phrases like

-Kakashi Hatake spotted in Suna at such and such a time.

-Anbu in a panic

-Jinchuriki accepting head pat. (and Orochimaru decodes that twice because he's not sure what to make of it.)

But the Sanin puts the pieces together.

The 'one eyed scarecrow' that wants to take out Danzo.

The Hatake brat cuddling up to Suna's Jinchuriki.

The fact that his invasion plan has been ousted.

Hatake has obviously used his sharingan to control the little jinchuriki and dragged the rest of suna along by threatening them with the beast. He plans to use Orochimaru's invasion to get into Konoha and gain his revenge on Danzo and Root....it's all rather impressive. 

Orochimaru doesn't know what happened on that mission two years ago, he's never thought to look to closely at it. Now he wonders if Kakashi was also ran out of Konoha, out of the only home he'd ever known, with no one to stand beside him because they had all 'left him behind'.

Orochimaru takes a deep breath and pushes the thoughts of Tsunade and Jiraiya from his mind. It will do no good to think on them and their abandonment of him.

Instead he thinks on the Uchiha eyes and how Hatake managed to get the coperation of the village by simply controlling their jinchuriki.

Curse Itachi, the bratty genius, if he'd gotten those eyes he could have increased his power exponentially by now.

Maybe he can grab the littlest Uchiaha during the invasion, a nice cursed seal would help.

But, the brat may fall under an innocent, and Orochimaru would rather not be fighting Konoha and Suna at the same time.

Hmm doesn't Danzo have a stash of Sharingan somewhere? Surely Hatake wont mind if Orochimaru just raids a Root base for them ...right?

Chapter Text

Chapter 91

Kakashi decides that with only three weeks until the chunin exams it's time to get his genin up for some serious training.

So Sukea waltzes into Konoha with a smile and a wave, camera in hand.

That night a blank masked Anbu leaves four notes for four people and fills out a few papers before leaving them to be filed.

The next morning Kakashi waits at the pre selected meet up place as three genin and a half weary jonin show up.

“KAKASHI-SENSEI!” is the loud and happy greeting by his genin.

“Hello team-7.” he says back and proceeds to give out head pats to both the genin and Tenzo who looks half guilty for being there and half out of his mind in excitement.

“Are you taking us to be missing nin?” Naruto asks with all the excitement of a puppy in front of a treat.

“Dope he only told us to pack for two weeks.” Sasuke butts in, however his eyes also hold a curious light. Kakashi has no doubt that Sasuke and the rest would say yes if he asked them to join him, possibly Tenzo too at this rate.

Kakashi cant help the smile that crosses his face seeing his genin here with him (his-his-his).

“Maa not quite genin mine. Who here can tell me what the chunin exams are?”

Naturally Sakura raises her hand.

“Yes Sakura?”

“There an opportunity for genin to get promoted to chunin, the exams are held bi-annually every year and rotate through the villages.” she answers and receives her head pat with a beaming smile. Kakashi makes a note that the boys look jealous.

“That's correct, and in three weeks the chunin exam will be taking place in konoha.”

Kakashi takes great delight in watching all three genins eyes widen in shock.

“And I've taken the liberty of signing you all up.”

Three little mouths open to various degrees and Kakashi's smile becomes a light chuckle.

He's pretty sure Tenzo makes a strangled noise at his side though.

Chapter Text

Chapter 92

“YOU WHAT???!!!!” the absolute screech from Naruto has his team mates jolting and rubbing there newly abused ears.

“I signed you three up for the chunin exams.” Kakashi repeats calmly and once again the three genin fall into excitement.

“You really think we're ready?” Sakura asks with a nervousness that has Kakashi remembering the little girl he once taught who tried her hardest to keep up with her power house teammates. Well, this time, Kakashi's gonna teach her how to be a power house herself (take that Tsunade, he can so teach a teen girl!)

Kakashi kneels down in front of his pink haired student and both the boys settle down (not that Sasuke needed to settle much but for a Uchiha he was practically doing the equivalent of a happy dance). He places a hand on either shoulder and taps her forehead to his.

“I don't know if you three will be promoted to chunin, but I can guarantee that you will be ready for this exam.” he says with all the serenity and seriousness he can muster.

“Really?”

“Yes, it will be hard work and all of you will be exhausted in the end but you will be ready.” He reassures her, holding the image of the woman she will become in his head and looking the smaller version in the eye hoping she can see it.

“ok sensei.”

“Yahoo what are we waiting for! Lets get Started! We're ready Sensei, Believe it!” Naruto naturally ruins the moment.

But Kakashi only chuckles reaching out to ruffle both boys hair as he raises to his feet.

“Alright then, give your packs to Tenzo so he can set up camp and then the three of you are going to work on individual training.”

The three eager genin practically bounce over to his poor lost looking kohai.

Hmmm maybe he should find something for Tenzo to do since Kakashi's practically taken over training for team 7. well, he'll worry about that later, for now he's going to focus on his genin.

Chapter Text

Chapter 93

Kakashi gathers his students together and has then all sit down so he can go over the goals for the next two weeks.

“Now Sasuke's main objective is to work on speed, with his lighting nature it wont be to hard for him to master the chidori-”

“Your teaching me your signature technique!” the little Uchiha blurts in and then blushes deeply when everyone turns to look at him. Aww look at his little rosy cheeks.

“Yes, I am, the only thing I ask is that you never use this jutsu on any member of your team.”

“Of course sensei.” the Uchiha replies easily, light pink still decorating his face.

“Sakura I wont be able to teach you much more medical techniques, frankly because anything above a C-rank is near impossible for me. But I can help you improve your strengthen.”

“I want to be strong sensei.”

“That's my girl.”

“And Naruto-”

“I'm ready for anything sensei, believe it!”

“I do believe it, but the techniques I want to show you is not one I can completely preform myself, and while I know the basics and how it's suppose to work I may not necessarily be the best one to teach you, so if you decide you'd like to learn another jutsu I'll be happy to teach you any one you like.”

Surprisingly Naruto doesn't immediately proclaim that he's ready to learn the mystery jutsu, instead he leans back, looks at the ground and squints at his feet. It's something Kakashi remembers Kushina doing when she was making a tough decision.

“Why do you want me to learn this justu?” he eventually asks, much softer then his usual bluster.

“It was a jutsu your father created.” Kakashi answers readily, and Naruto's head snaps up to look him in the eye.

“It's something he would have taught you himself if he were able. I want to teach this to you so you can have a part of him.”

A quiet settles over the group for a moment and Kakashi sees tears beginning to collect in the boys eyes. Luckily before he can start bawling Sasuke gently bumps his shoulder, this causes the Blond to vigorously scrub his face and take a deep breath.

“What's this jutsu called anyway?”

“The Rasengan.”

Chapter Text

Chapter 94 

Tenzo sits on a large rock that seems like is was strategically placed to watch all three genin at once, and knowing his senpai it just might be. He's been tasked to be an over seer for the next five hours while Kakashi-senpai ran off to do...something. He wasn't exactly clear on what but Tenzo suspects it will end up as a headache for the Hokage at some point.

He makes sure that Sasuke isn't going to break an ankle as he tries to up his speed. The chidori takes quite the amount and there's only so many weights you can add to a growing body before it breaks (well, unless you Gai..or mini-Gai that is).

He helps Sakura stich up a tear in her gloves, a pair of Kakashi's old ones that he mended down to size for her. The gloves are meant to be ruined but Sakura looks like she's about to cry every time a thread comes out of place. Tenzo's already seen her crush a small rock in her bear hand after one unwanted rip. If she breaks down crying he's not sure if he should try to comfort her, or run away before she crushes the bones in his hand.

He looks at Naruto....and gets a headache.

Why did Kakashi-senpai think it was a good idea for the blond to use shadow clone jutsu to train with? There's practically a sea of orange for half a mile were the young boy is furiously working on trying to make a balloon pop.

Yes Tenzo knows it will speed up the process incredibly but as already stated Tenzo is getting a headache.

Just then his parameter alarms trip, but a chakra message quickly follows. It looks like Kakashi-senpai is done with his self appointed task early.

Thankfully the genin are all extremely focused on their task because Tenzo isn't sure how they'd take Kakashi-senpai coming out of the wood, with a little dark haired child in tow.

“Maa Tenzo, I'd like for you to meet Sai. Sai I'd like for you to meet your new Sensei.”

WAIT? WHAT?!

Chapter Text

Chapter 95 

Tenzo is in a mild panic...ok a bit more than a mild panic but in his defense Kakashi-senpai just dropped a whole human on him and told him it was his now.

What the heck is he suppose to do with this thing?

This is not a genin...wait or is it?

A few quick hand signs to Kakashi confirm that this is not a genin.

A few more quick hand signs tell him that the child is male and a former Root operative.

Oh, great, well at least he knows the child's gender now. It's not his fault that the clothing style was messing him up, ok. He was in an Anbu squad with Itachi and Shisui, both very pretty men. He's not judging, honest.

Ok now that that's established what exactly is he supposed to be teaching a former Root operative.

What do you mean teach him how to socially interact with people?!

Senpai? Senpai! SENPAI!!!

ok ya know what, never mind, he can do this. Tenzo himself was once a socially awkward former Root operative, surly he can teach someone else how to properly interact with people.

Oh Sage, who is he kidding, Tenzo is still a socially awkward former Root operative and a science experiment on top of that.

There is no way this is ending well.

No wait, stop that! Senpai has given you a task and you will complete it with the best of your abilities, now stop weeping like a willow and get busy.

Best to start small right. A greeting should work, he can teach him how to properly greet a fellow ninja right?

A quick lesson and a few examples before he sends the boy off to greet Sakura...and watch as she punches him in the face.

….Right.....this is gonna take more work than he thought.

Maybe Tenzo should teach him to just nod instead of opening up his mouth.

Oh look the sapling did it, aww Sasuke nodded back. Progress.

He should give his sapling a reward.

Maybe a head pat like Kakashi gives? Those always feel nice.

Wait! Why did the sapling just give him that look? Did he do it wrong?

Was it to hard? Not the right amount of ruffling? Did he tug the saplings hair?

Senpai? Senpai! SENPAI HELP!!!!

Chapter Text

Chapter 96

Kakashi beams at his adorable little terrors as they settle in for one last night at camp. It's been a little over two weeks but they've already showed so much progress and Kakashi couldn't be prouder.

He watches as Sakura carefully wraps Sasuke's singed arm with a bit of burn cream. The dark haired boy eyeing his teammate with great caution, not that Kakashi can blame him after Sakura showed off her ability to punch a boulder into dust.

The boys both decided that Sakura won the competition for 'most improved' after the display.

Sasuke is on par with his past (future?) self from the third part of the exams, able to use two chidori's before chakara exhaustion hits. Where as Naruto is still unable to form a complete Rasengan, although he does have enough power behind it to knock a grown man out. (Kakashi maybe shouldn't have volunteered Tenzo as a practice dummy.)

The amount of clones he can produce on a whim now is rather intimidating as well.

They should be more than ready for the chunin exams but Kakashi worries anyway.

“Kakashi-sensei?” Sakura calls from where she's rolling out the sleeping mats, Kakashi notices that she's put Sai's near Sasuke's and stifles a laugh.

“Yes Sakura-chan?”

“Can you give us any advice before we go back tomorrow?” she asks sweetly, probably hoping for a cheat of some kind.

Hmmm well its not quite a cheat but there are definitely some things he can pass on.

“Beware of Snakes.” he starts and the disappointed look on her face is a little funny, but he carries on, “Sound cannot be trusted but sand is an ally, try finding the red head.”

He ends his words of wisdom by pulling out 'The wirl-wind romance of the samurais bride' and opening in front of his face. The love scene's in the book leave something to be desired but the drama is addicting.

He watches Sakura huff out of the corner of his eye and smiles beneath his mask, ah messing with his genin is so much fun.

“Hey Sakura-chan how come your sleeping so far away form us?” Naruto calls to his teammate, clearly not worried about Kakashi's cryptic words.

“I'm not sleeping near a bunch of boys!” is her immediate and offended come back.

Thats right, Sakura is the only girl …..Kakashi has a small panic attack when he realizes that his genin are about to go through puberty and all that intel's.

“Maa Sakura-chan. I have a task for you.” he calls lightly, hoping that his nervousness doesn't show.

“What can I do for you sensei?”

“In the near future I need you to seek out a strong and terrifying female role model to look up to.”

“you want me to look for another sensei” the stricken look on the girls face is not something Kakashi was expecting.

“No, no, nothing like that, just a uh , a senpai that you can go to for the hmm more delicate things in life.”

“oh.” is the pinkeets response, “I can do that.”

“Wonderful.”

Kakashi may be able to teach Sakura make-up, dieting and the art of seductions in his gashia disguise but he'd rather face three anbu squads than explain periods and tampons to his thirteen year old student.

Chapter Text

Chaper 97

Hiruzen was having such a good day. There were no meetings scheduled, the elder council and the clans were busy with preparations for the chunin exams, even the birds were enjoying the nice calm that had settled over the tower.

Which is naturally why Hiruzen is not surprised in the slightest when a frazzled chunin burst into his office looking like they've seen a ghost (or passed the current genin team assigned to catch Tora, that usually sends people into flash backs). He does give an internal sigh because the peace was just to good to last.

“h-ho-ho-hoka-kage-sa-sa-sama”

“Yes?” he asks the stuttering mess currently parading as a ninja.

The man doesn't even bother pulling himself together, he simply holds out a filed form with shaky fingers.

Hiruzen leans out over his desk a bit and scans the form. At first glance it looks to be regular request for team training trip outside the village. At second look however the form is filled out for team 7 and the signature at the bottom is a very familiar, head-ache inducing, henohenomoheji.

Hiruzen takes three seconds to curse within the safety of his own mind, then he takes three more seconds to curse Hatake and his ancestors for good measure.

On the bright side Hatake also filled out the assistant section with the name Tenzo Yamato so at least there will be some form of sanity involved in the children's training and hopefully the young wood user will keep all plans for joining a missing-nin to a minimum. (He'd ask for none existent but he'll well aware that Naruto at least would jump full force off a waterfall if Hatake asked it of him right now)

“Anbu Tiger and Anbu Bat, please search through any paperwork submitted in the last week for anything else Hatake might have filled out without our notice.” he addresses his hidden guard as the chunin tries to recover.

Hiruzen himself simply takes a deep pull from his pipe.

Then takes several more when the Anbu come back with three admittance forms for the chunin exams.

Chapter Text

chapter 98

Temari scowls as she looks around at all the greenery.

Konoha is covered in it. This is what Suna has to compete with, and Temari is bitter to say that they maybe losing in the scenery department.

But that's not why she and her brothers are wandering around. There mission... well ok Temari's mission is to find out who Kakashi leaf genin are and then prove her team superiority. No one is stealing her favorite sensei without a fight. And she means a Fight.

Her internal grumbling is interrupted when a small snot nosed brat runs into Kankuro at full force. Naturally her own brat of a brother decides to pick on the kid.

He's totally going to ruin her plan for luring Kakashi-sensei to Suna if he doesn't cut it out.

Then a blonde loud mouth and a pink chick show up and Temari is just done.

“Kankuro if you don't put that kid down right now, I will be using you as the test dummy for my new jutsu.”

Temari will admit to being pretty pleased when she sees her brother pale under his face paint before dropping the kid like he's a live scorpion, and giving a quick and humble apology.

Humph that's better.

“That was so cool.” a voice says and Temari turns to see Pinky staring at her with practical stars in her eyes.

“Can you teach me how to glare my teammates into submission like that?” the brightly colored girl asks. But before Temari can answer the blonde boy cuts in.

“Wha, Sakura-chan you can already punch boulders to dust, I don't think you need to be any scarier.” he blabs.

Wait 'boulders'? Surly that's an exaggeration, the girl is tiny and pink and cutsey all over, there's no way she's punching actual boulders to dust.

“Sensei said to find a strong and terrifying female senpai.” is the girls happy response and the blonde starts whining ugh she doesn't have time for this.

“I'd suggest practicing the glare in a mirror until your happy with it and always be able to back up your threats,” Temari tells her quickly.

“Thank you Senpai!” the girl beams at her and Temari has to fight a scowl. But now she can give a quick goodbye calming she has to find her brother.

She's not sure where Gaara wandered of to but it makes the perfect excuse to get away from these kids.

Now, they need to find Kakashi's konoha genin team and show him how much better they are than some pampered tree huggers.

Chapter Text

Chapter 99

Kabuto sighs as he heads into the flower district to once again look for the illusive geisha.

He's going to gain a 'reputation' at this rate.

Well actually he already has, but its certainly not something he thought it would be.

Weeks ago when he first come looking for the lady messenger he unintentionally rescued a white haired woman wearing a red kimono. It wasn't until after he ran off her harasser that he realized this wasn't the woman he was looking for.

But since he still had on his 'polite genin' face he offered to heal her bruised wrist. She told him some lovely black mail material on a jonin as payment.

When he came back a day later the same woman spotted him and asked if he'd mind looking at her friends black eye.

One healed eye later and he now knows that the principle of the ninja school actually wanted to be head of t&i.

And so the pattern has continued, for weeks. He's healed a variety of bruises, scraps, sprains and one a broken finger, but has yet to see hid nor hair of the messenger woman.

On the bright side he has a great reputation among the working women and there information has proved valuable if random.

On the downside he almost got stabbed in the kidney by a customer because he was “flirting with MY girl.” the idiot was promptly shown the error of his ways.

He's still not quite sure how to tell Orochimaru-sama how he managed to create an information network in the red flower district.

“Maaa if it isn't Kabuto-kun.” an amused voice humms.

An amused voice that he hasn't heard in weeks.

He whips around to see the Scarecrows messenger standing as pretty as you please at the corner of the street. Her fan gently waving in front of her beautiful face and her eyes dancing with mirth.

Kabuto kind of wants to scream in frustration. He's been looking for this woman for Weeks and then she just waltzes up out of the blue looking amused at his suffering.

“Hello Geisha-san, it is good to see you again.” he says around a strained smile.

“You to Kabuto-kun. Do you have a reply for me?”

“I do indeed, 'he' would be happy to join you in taking out the rotten roots of the tree.”

The lady blinks a bit, perhaps in shock, before a terrifying smile forms on those pretty painted lips.

Chapter Text

Chapter 100 chunin exam start

Sakura huffs as she drags her boys past the crowd on the wrong floor. Like she'd fall for something so stupid, even Naruto saw past it....ok so he actually wasn't paying attention but she'll give him credit because he isn't making a loud ruckus right now.

After they enter the correct room though it becomes a different story.

Between him and Kiba the whole room is looking in their direction. Sakura wants to melt into the wall at first but then remembers Kakashi-sensei and straightens her spine. She will not be intimidated, and if anyone gets in her face she'll show them just how fast she can crush a rock in her fist.

A familiar face not far away catches her attention.

“Senpai!” she calls in delight and smiles when the older girl turns her direction,

“Oh hey.” Senpai looks board but Sakura can see the tension in her shoulders and watches as the blondes eyes scan the crowd.

For potential threats maybe? Or is she looking for her younger brother? He wasn't there last time so maybe he's the type to wander off often?

“Oh it's you again.” the boy beside her says in a snide voice and Sakura recognizes him as the boy who was taunting Konohamaru, she thinks his name is Kanko? Kakuro? Either way he's being rude.

Sakura responds by giving him the glare she's been practicing in the mirror. She must have it closer to senpai's look than she thought because the boy pales and takes a step behind his blonde teammate. Senpai simply huffs at him.

“oh forgive me senpai I never caught your name.” Sakura says turning back to the blond.

Senpai gives her a raised eyebrow and a frown.

“Temari, this idiot is my brother Kankuro and this one is my other brother Gaara.”

Sakura blinks when Gaara comes into view.

Didn't Kakashi-sensei say something about finding a red head?

She opens her mouth to ask but the door opens with a Bang and Sakura's mind is taken up with the beginning of the Chunin exams.

Chapter Text

Chapter 101

Sasuke listens to the proctor go over the rules and then looks at his paper with interest. The questions are hard, but nothing Sakura would have trouble with, and from the looks of things a few others know some answers as well.

Sasuke realized the objective of the test right from the beginning of course, it's to see how well they can cheat, how well they can gather information. Kakashi-sensei taught them enough about looking underneath the underneath for him to realize that. (He will never look at a civilian the same way again, not after the photographer and the geisha)

Sasuke could of course use the Sharingan to complete the objective and simply copy the movements of somebody's arm.....

But he remembers The Day he gained them, and yes it deserves capital letters. (Gai-sensei would be proud to know he's added them to his vocabulary)

Kakashi-sensei had pulled him aside on there fourth day of training and asked him if he still cared about learning the sharingan. Of course he did! It wasn't even a question really.

He remembers being so excited about finally having part of his families legacy, remembers thinking that his teacher found him worthy now, that he was doing good.

And then he'd seen Kakashi-sensei slit Naruto's throat as the blond smiled at him bright and trusting.

To gain, one must loose.

Kakashi-sensei, the nuke-nin that he's foolishly trusted (Foolish little brother) said as the blood pools at his feet.

The scene had vanished suddenly, like the ghosts of a bad dream, and Kakashi-sensei was kneeling in front of him an apology already passing his lips. Everything in sharp focus compared to the earlier blurriness of unshed tears.

“The only way I know to gain the power of the sharingan is to watch your best friend die.”

It had taken Sasuke a few minutes to realize that what he had seen was a genjutsu...and that he now had a Sharingan.

Kakashi-sensei had then walked Sasuke back to camp were he saw Naruto arguing with Sai as Sakura helped Yamato-sensei set up lunch.

“I want you too look at them with your Sharingan, because the memories you make with these eyes will never fade.”

What went unsaid was 'you need at least one happy memory to hold onto because most of the things you will see are not going to be pretty'.

Kakashi taught him a lot those two weeks, more than he'd ever learned under the stifling attention of there unfortunate first jonin teacher.

Including the wonderful art of trolling.

“Hey Sakura?” he called across the room, gaining the attention of not only his team mate but all the other occupants as well.

“Do you have the answer to number eight?” he asks and watches as she blinks at him before realizing what he's up to. She nods and hold out her paper for him to copy.

“Thanks.”

“And what do you think your doing?” a voice calls behind him as he starts writing the answers down. The protractor looms over him probably trying to be intimidating but Sasuke has been around Gai and Kakashi, and only fears happy smiles.

“Cheating. You said we can only get caught three times right? Well, this is my first one.” he answers boldly and likes to think Kakashi-sensei would be proud enough to give him a head pat at the look on the mans face.

Chapter Text

Chapter 102 

Naruto sits in his seat and tries really really hard not to fidget to much as the big man tells them about the tenth question.

He's not super smart like Sakura who can answer all the questions and he's not sneaky like Sasuke who got the answers from her right in front of all and sun dry, but he's got enough determination to level a mountain with a fork if he puts his mind to it.

He's not sure why he'd have to level a mountain with a fork but it's the first thing that come to mind.

No that's a lie, the first thing that came to mind was Kakashi-sensei as he kneeled in front of them and told them they may not win the exams but he knew they were ready.

He wonders if Kakashi-sensei knew that the written test was the first part of the exam and wonders if he should just walk away now and spare himself Kakashi-sensei's disappointment. Or maybe sensei would be disappointed that he didn't even try?

But Naruto hasn't even answered one question on this test how is he supposed to get the tenth one right?

What if he drags his team down? What if he gets them kicked out? What about Yamato-sensei? Will he ditch them and just take Sai? Will his team replace him?

Will Kakashi-sensei replace him?

No! Naruto is Not letting that happen he decides and with a bang he slams his hand down on the desk and opens his mouth to tell this big jerk the it doesn't matter if he passes or fails here because he has people who believe in him and he absolutely will become Hokage some day, even if he's never promoted in his life.

He'll just be the first genin Hokage...Kakashi-sensei would still be proud of him for that right?

Chapter Text

Chapter 103 Poor Ibiki

Ibiki Is use to being the most intimidating man in any room. He's use to the side eyes glances and the fear or unease that flashes on a persons face when he comes near.

What he is not use to is children....dozens of chunin wannabe's who are crammed in a room and 'socializing' before the first part of the exam.

He, of course, takes note of some things from the hidden camera's like the repeats from last year and the groups the children form.

Most stay with there own team, but a few wander over to there village mates. Nothing unusual.

Well, nothing unusual until a pink haired little girl approaches a sand kunoichi, calling her 'senpai' of all things. He knows who she is of course, how could he not after dealing with 'The Hatake Report' and while he'd like to investigate that further it's time to start the exam.

After his 'dramatic' entrance and 'intimating' speech, he leans back to watch the room as the test begins.

A third of the way through the little Uchiha punk has the audacity to ask pinky what the answer to a question is and then throw the rules back in Ibiki's face like he isn't one of the top interrogation experts in the leaf village.

Ibiki gains his composer back quickly of course but he's keeping an eye on that kid, and shutting down that form of cheating before anybody else gets any bright ideas. 

Then the time comes for the tenth question and the tension gets so high that the teams start dropping like flies.

Well, all the way up until the loud blond opens his mouth, then it comes to a standstill.

After Anko's 'grand' entrance Ibiki gathers up the papers and finds out the blonde only wrote his name on the paper.

What in the sages sweet name has Hatake been teaching these kids?

At first he was annoyed, but now he's kind of impressed, no wonder the kids weren't intimidated by him especially compared to S-rank missing nin Hatake Kakashi.

Chapter Text

Chapter 104

When Orochimaru finally meets up with the 'one-eyed scarecrow' he finds the man reading a romance novel of all things with a camera around his throat.

Well they do say the more powerful the ninja the crazier they are, and sage knows Orochimaru has no grounds to stand on when it comes to sanity.

“How nicce to ssee you Hatake-sssan.” he greets and is amused when the only reaction he gets is a slow blink, most people at least startle when they hear the hiss in his voice.

“Orochimaru-san.” he greets with a nod, there is no fear, but he is being watched, it feels more like two predator's sizing up one another than anything else. It makes Orochimaru wonder when the last time he felt equal to someone was, when the last time he could connect with someone.

Maybe his team, before Jariya decided that a few orphan children not even of there own village were worth more than whatever bond they had, and Tsunade decided to run away from her own guilt and nightmares at the end of a bottle.

Orochimaru cut the thoughts short before he drove himself to misery, the point was it'd been a long time since he'd had an ally on the same level working toward the same goal.

And no Akatsuki didn't count.

He had no interest in world domination only immortality and even then he was mocked by the others who'd supposedly already obtained it. Not to mention the Uchiha and his too pretty face with his too power eyes.

“I already have the location of the last root bases and even Danzo's supposed schedule for the chunin exams but i'm not sure about the time to ambush him would be. We'll also have to be worried about the suicided seal he carries.” Hataki's words are a welcome distraction form his spiraling thoughts.

He's had trouble staying focused since nulling the annoying root seal and absently wonders if the blasted thing was also messing with other things in his head.

“Hmm perhapsss we sshould dessstroy the bases first and sssave Danzo himsself for later. That way we can cut down the number of reinforcements' that may come to help him.”

“We might need to consider the Hokage as one of those reinforcements.”

“I'd be more than happy to dissstract him.”

“I'm sure you would.”

Chapter Text

Chapter 105

Kakashi is a little on edge around the snake Sanin. After all the man killed his Hokage in a past life, implanted a curse seal into his student and hurt Tenzo. But the man also became the kage of sound and after his resurrection was actually a valuable ally to Konoha, or at least to Naruto.

Ah, the wonderful benefits of 'talk-no-jutsu'.

“We should probably meet up with Kabuto before we finalize these plans.” Orochimaru says interrupting Kakashi's wool gathering.

“He's not competing in the exams?” the copy-nin asks, he remembers the boy being there last time.

“No we decided his roll outside them would be more beneficial, but that does mean I don't know were to find him at the current moment.”

“Ah, I might have an idea of his location.”

“oh?”

“yes...how do you feel about silk?”

.

.

.

The answer was that Orochimaru apparently loved silk, and kimonos, and fans, and makeup, and hair accessories.

Kakashi wasn't sure why he was surprised by this when he knew the future. But it was kind of hard to reconcile the man that he remembered as a mad scientist who wanted revenge on the village that exiled him with the current display in front of him.

Apparently Orochimaru was having trouble picking between 'deep plum' and 'mystical amethyst' for his eyeshadow.

Kakashi gave himself a mental shrug and gently flipped his fan in front of his painted face.

“Oro-chan I think your hair would look just perfect in a bun, then we can add the hair ornaments.~” he half sung because if he was going to be crossing dressing with a once enemy in the heart the village that would try to kill them both he was going to play up the act for all it was worth.

A sudden choking noise drew his attention away from Orochimaru doing up his hair to see Kabuto staring at them with a mix of horror, bewilderment, and embarrassment plastered on his face.

“Ah Kabuto-kun you found us.~”

Has Kakashi mentioned how much he loves messing with people?

Chapter Text

Chapter 106

Sai is....not sure what to think.

He's currently stands beside his sensei, who is obviously a Root superior but the man throws emotions all over the place so Sai is less inclined to think he is a regular root tool and perhaps something else all together.

Sai knows there were girls who were taken away and taught to be different, taught to be soft and sweet, taught to bat there eyes and share their beds. He wonders if he's being trained in a different way now too.

He knows he is suppose to be a tool, or at least he thinks he's still suppose to be a tool, nobody has told him otherwise yet. Though maybe it was one of those things he was suppose to figure out himself....or maybe its a test.

He stifles his emotions down as he remembers his last 'test'.

Sai doesn't want to think of Shin right now.

Doesn't want to think of how Yamato-sensei's hand on his head is the first time since his brothers death that he's felt any comfort from another. He'd been so surprised when the man had ever so gently rubbed his hair. No pain, no ache, not even a little pull.

He thinks Shin would have liked Yamato, and the rest of team 7 too, missing nin and all.

Ah speaking of team 7 it looks like they've made it to the second round of the chunin exams.

Sensei sits up a little straighter on the roof next to him as they watch a loud purple haired woman lead the group of chunin hopefuls past there loitering spot.

Naruto and Sakura are easy enough to spot with there bright hair and bright personalities, Sasuke is not far behind. The dark haired teen must feel Sais stare because he turns to look there direction. When he makes eye contact with Sai the other boy nods his head, so Sai nods back. He's learned this is an approved form of greeting and Sai prefers it to Sakura's violent ones and Naruto's loud ones.

Plus Sensei always gives Sai a gentle hand on his head when that happens.

Sure enough sensei sees the action and slowly, oh so slowly, reaches out and runs his fingers and palm over Sai's hair. The action seems even gentler and slower than the last one.

Sai stays as still as possible throughout the action, which is why he catches Sasuke watching the whole thing. Then the Uchiha gives Sai a gesture with his thumb pointing at the sky.

Sai is a little confused because he doesn't recognize this hand sign but sensei seems delighted over the interaction so Sai returns it making sure to mimic the tilt of Sasuke's mouth as well.

Sai still doesn't know what to make of this or team 7 in general but he thinks he likes it here.

Chapter Text

Chapter 107

Sakura hides the scroll in her pocket before turning back to the boys. Naruto has already made a handful of clones that are rushing away to scout around them. Sasuke is securing the fake scroll that he made with genjutsu and a stick to his belt, in plane view for any idiot to try and snatch.

With a nod he turns back to the two of them. “what team should we go after?” he asks and Sakura starts knocking off there options. She's found it helps to explain her thoughts out loud so that all three of them are on the same page.

“We shouldn't go after any other Konoha ninja because Konoha needs to make a good showing and they may be our future allies on missions. We should leave Suna out for similar reasons.”

“And because your senpai is from sand.” Naruto cuts in with a grumble, he seems to be a little miffed about that. Maybe she should tell Kakashi he needs a senpai as well? Or maybe she can get him to be-friend one of Temari's brothers, the red head most likely.

“Yes that too.” she adds before continuing on.

“Grass or Sound would both be good targets. After all we don't know if there scroll will be the one we need.”

“I thought Kakashi-sensei said to stay away from Sound?” Naruto asks his eyes squinting in the way that means he's thinking hard.

“Dope he told us not to trust them, that doesn't mean avoid them.” Sasuke adds giving the blonde an eye roll. Naruto sticks his tongue out in return but their banter ends there as they look back at her.

Sakura feels a little pride swell in her chest as she realizes the boys are looking to her for the decision, they're looking to her as the leader.

Right she'll have a happy break down later about how far she's come, for now they have a chunin exam to pass.

Chapter Text

Chapter 108

Kakashi may have just realized that he forgot to let Suna in on the change of plans when he sees Baki walking down the street with two other Suna shinobi.

Opps.

On the bright side Orochimaru is still planning an invasion, more for a distraction now than the full scale mayhem it was last time. And Suna seems to be in Konoha's good graces judging by the fact that there are fewer Anbu guards following them around compared to previously.

But he should probably let Rasa know, or at least give Baki a heads up just in case the sand nin decides to take out Orochimaru in the middle of the fight against Danzo.

Because knowing team 7 luck that's the most likely thing to happen.

A few minutes later Kakashi finds himself in one of the private rooms in what Kakashi has mentally dubbed Kabuto's favorite teahouse. Going over plans with his unlikely companions.

“If we had a way to remove the seal we could cut his forces in half, or at least create so much confusion among them that it would be easier to get to Danzo.” Kabuto says.

The poor boy still cant look at the snake sanin properly.

“I can ssstall the seal and make it disconnected but only to one individual at a time. I'm good at ssseals but we'd need a seal master to help create an area attached to the threads of the ssseaal in order to remove them.” Orochimaru hisses out looking over the papers in front of them, the ornamented hair piece he's wearing giving a little chime as he does so.

“hmm if we could pull Jaryaia in we might be able to work something out.” Kakashi answers and the snake gives a small scowl before snorting.

“The fools in rice country right now anyway, hunting down rumors of my presence.” the man dismisses.

Kakashi gives another hmm but takes a delicate sip of his tea before asking.

“If we could get him here and in agreement to help with the project, would you be able to work with him again?”

He asks gently and watches as Orochimaru stills, conflict dancing in his eyes.

“Perhapsss” is the soft answer.

Hmmm maybe Kakashi isn't the only man who misses his team.

Chapter Text

Chapter 109

Ino knows she's suppose to be paying attention to the forest around her and the exam their taking but her thoughts keep circling back to Sakura and the way she's changed recently.

They're not bad changes, in fact there mostly good things.

When Ino had first seen the picture in the kunoichi magazine she though 'wow what a strong woman.' then she'd found out it was Sakura and her mind had gone blank.

Because that....didn't look like the Sakura Ino knew.

The Sakura Ino knew was the type to fold in on herself, the type to be self-conscious about her looks, the type to be protected rather than the protector.

But then she'd found her ex-best friend on a training ground sweat pouring off her as she went through the academy katas. She'd thrown the magazine in her face of course because how dare her rival in love apply to a competition and not let Ino know. But instead of their typical verbal back and forth, Sakura had held her hands up in the 'start' position and all but demanded Ino fight her.

Ino had, of course, won the fight but it had taken days for some of those bruises to heal.

Then she'd hardly seen the pinkeet unless they were passing each other by. She'd spotted Sakura flittering around the hospital and talking to Iruka-sensei, and always carrying more scrolls than was probably healthy.

But that was still the Sakura she knew, the quiet little book worm who could recite six facts about any given topic. She thought all was well, that nothing had changed, that they were still ex-besties and rivals over Sasuke's affection. She'd been happy knowing that, content with the status-quo.

Then Ino saw her at the chunin exams and everything got flipped on it's head. Because Sakura didn't even care that she was next to Sasuke, she didn't even acknowledge Ino's presence when she'd slipped up beside him. Instead Sakura had made a bee line for some Suna kunoichi that barely looked at her.

It was infuriating, who did that chick thinks she was! Ino was Sakura's rival! Ino was the ex-best friend! Ino was the one Sakura should have been talking too!

And Sakura's not the only one whos changed, just look at Sasuke! Loudly asking Sakura that question in the middle of the exams and then boldly talking back to the most intimidating man T&I has had since it's founding? Ino knew he was cool but she also kind of wonders if he's suicidal.

Not to mention Naruto and his speech at the end. Seriously what the heck is up with these three? How are they so strong?

....and how can Ino catch up?

Chapter Text

Chapter 110

Temari marches through the forest with a snarl on her face. This place is ridiculous! The bugs here are ridiculous! Even the Humidity is ridiculous!

“uh Temari?” Kankuro asks.

“What!” she snaps at him, she's not in the mood to entertain him, she has a konoha genin team to find and knock out of the exams! Doesn't he know what's at stake here?

“Yikes, calm down already, we need a plan before we just go marching off.”

The growl she sent his way for that comment made a few of the animals tracking them scatter. It also had Kankuro trying to hide behind Gaara. Humph the scardy cat.

Gaara the darling only gave her a slow blink.

“The plan is to find Kakashi-sensei's other team and steal their scroll.” she tells him over the top of Gaara's head.

“But we don't even know who they are and what if they have the same scroll? Besides shouldn't we get along with them since were kind of all one big team?”

her brother is a idiot. Temari decides as she glares at him, while he tries to hid behind Gaara's red head. It's not working so well for him with the height difference.

“I wouldn't mind making friends.” Gaara says looking off in the distance.

Bless this sweet desert child.

“Fine we'll attack the first team we come across then and if they have the right scroll we'll head to the tower.” she concedes because Gaara is her favorite brother and he could maybe use some friends.

But does it have to be their rival team?

Oh well whatever she can take her aggression out on the over sized leeches around here.

…....

Shikamaru wishes he'd stayed home right now.

Why did Asuma-sensei sign them up for this again?

Oh yeah the troublesome bridge mission.

Another incident were he'd wished he'd stayed home.

It was suppose to be a simple C-rank, guiding a drunk builder to his home to finish a bridge. Shikamaru had had his suspicions at the beginning about the drunk guy, but was to lazy to truly figure it out. (He kind of regretted that later)

It was bad enough that they were attacked by the demon brothers, then the Demon of the mist showed up and he and his team barley survived before the hunter nin came. Only it wasn't actually a hunter nin but an accomplice and the Demon of the bloody mist showed back up and it was a fight for there lives.

He never wanted to see Ino and Chouji like that again, never wanted to feel that helpless ever again.

And then suddenly there was another missing nin, this one form Konoha and obviously a few kunai short of a weapons' pouch. If the crazy guy hadn't shown up Shikamaru is pretty sure they'd all be dead.

And apparently their sensei had thought something similar because they'd been training a lot harder since they'd gotten back. Shikamaru had only complained a little bit about the extra work.

He was going to protect his team now, no more feeling helpless.

That didn't however mean he had to be happy about about being in this sage forsaken forest.

Chapter Text

Chapter 111

Kakashi and Orochimaru bide farewell to Kabuto when the med-nin announces he has a shift at the hospital. The boy was finally able to look Orochimaru in the face too.

“We need Jiraiya.” Orochimaru grumbles looking at the papers spread across the table, the poor tea set had long been emptied and relocated to the floor.

“Hmmm yes, but there are two questions that need to be answered before he's truly involved.” Kakashi responds looking over Kabuto's random list of information. The hand writing is a lot neater than any doctors he's ever looked at, which means that you still need to tilt it an an angle and squint if you want to see something half way readable.

“Oh?” Orochimaru replies his shoulders staying stiff as he rises his eyes to look as Kakashi.

“You already know one, would you be able to work with him? After all you guys did have a falling out. And two would he even be willing to help us?”

Orochimaru snorts, “A falling out? That man left us after we just sssurvived the most stressful fight of our livesss againssst a man who ruled his country with poissson and fear. And he left usss for children! Children not even of Konoha who were probably going to die within the next month with how that village was acting! It would have been a mercy to just kill them! But NO! The bloody bleeding heart has to ssstay there and train them! Not bring them back to Konoha but train them There! In that wet missserable place that He had complained about the whole time! And sssuddely it didn't matter that we'd barely ssssurvived together, that it was only our so called TEAM WORK that sssaved us, he wanted to just abandon the team, the village, everything he'd ever known because there were thessse Pathetic Children that needing looking after! If it wasssnt for the fact that Hiruzen-sssensssei was the Hokage he would have been declared a traitor for abandoning the village in a time of War!”

Kakashi gives the snarling snake a slow blink. Then, because apparently he's living life on the edge of danger and mischief, he gently places his hand on top of Orochimaru bowed head carefully avoiding the intricate and slightly deadly hair ornament.

“Feel better?” he asks because really what do you say to a rant like that?

But Orochimaru's fist unclenches and the snake takes a calming breath, “I do actually.” he answers before a look of contemplation makes its way across his face.

“I'll feel even better after I yell at that idiot as well. Hmmm perhaps the seal was also messing with a persons emotional capabilities.”

“You did say it seemed to try to suppressing them, but it looking to be canceled out by the third layer that called for a persons focus to be on a specific task.”

“hmmm very well, we can bring in Jiraiya. But it'll take two week to get to Rice country alone, much less find the fool.”

"Maa I've got a faster way.”

“oh?”

Kakashi gives the man a wink as he activates Kamui,

“Yep, but a missing nin never reveals there secrets.”

The wide eyed look at his dramatic exit will be forever be etched into Kakashi memory via Sharingan, much to the mans delight.

Chapter Text

Chapter 112

Kakashi lands in rice country in all his cross-dressing glory and as such only takes two hours to find the toad sage.

Or more accurately it only takes two hours for the man to hear about a rumor of a gorgeous beauty in the town over and to head that direction. For um research purposes of course.

“O Ho Ho why hello there gorgeous! Allow this handsome man to introduce himself. For you see I am none other than the mighty toad sage Jiraiya of the Sanin!” the booming voice calls and Kakashi turns to see Jiraiya with hearts in his eyes as he approaches.

Kakashi whips out his delicate fan and places it in front of his face before he laughs at the ridiculous picture the sage makes. This was not how he planned to recruit the man but well whatever works.

“Oh my are you The Jiraiya-sama? Author of the ichi ichi series? I'm a huge fan.” Kakashi flutters his eyes to complete the look and watches the toad sage preen in happiness.

This poor man.

“That's right! It is I the author of the best series known to man! Perhaps you'd like to help me with the next book eh gorgeous?” Jariya asks with a wink as he comes closer and takes Kakashi's hand into his.

“Oh I'd be delighted to~.” Kakashi responds because he's having far to much fun with this. Although he should probably get down to business now.

“Ah Jiraiya-sama?” Kakashi probes gently cutting off whatever self praise the Sanin is saying now.

“Yes gorgeous?”

“Are you a really strong ninja?”

“OF course I am!” he replies puffing up in self importance.

“Then you could fight a powerful old man?”

“Of course I could!”

“But he has soldiers bound to him by seals.”

“Your looking at Konoha's best seal master!”

“So you'll help me and my friend?”

“Of course”

“Oh that's Wonderful!” Kakashi says and snaps his fan shut to give the toad sage his most beautiful smile.

Then he activates kamui and drops them both practically in Orochimaru's lap.

“Well if it issssn't Jiraiya-baka” comes the snakes hissing voice.

The look on Jiraiya's face as he sees Orochimaru cross-dressing suddenly tops Orochimaru's own expression at Kakashi's dramatic exit.

Chapter Text

Chapter 113

Jiraiya tries to get his emotions under control because he's just been kidnapped by an unknown and dropped into his ex-team mates lap.

His ex-team mate who looks oh so pretty in the geisha get up an-NO FOCUS!

Kidnapped by missing nin here!

Tho the lady who kid napped him is indeed a very gorgeous woman. Those red lips, those half closed eyes, those delightful curves.

FOCUS!

“Teme.” He says and it almost comes out steady as he slowly pulls himself from Orochimarus lap.

This is not how he pictured there reunion that's for sure.

Orochimaru smirks at him, because of course the snake can sense his unease (and probably his embarrassment too).

“What has Hatake told you so far?” he asks and Jiraiya blinks at him.

“Hatake?” because that is also a person he's pretty sure he'd never have a peaceful reunion with.

“Oh Hi.” Jiraiya's gorgeous kidnapper says and with a wave of her hand and a puff of smoke he's suddenly staring at another of Konoha's S-rank missing nin. He's torn between horror that the gorgeous lady was actually a gorgeous male and deep seated worry that he's now sitting between two of Konoha's least stable geniuses (just throw in Itachi and he'd be three for three at this point)

Lucky for him the two traitors seem to be uninterested in starting a fight and even mostly uninterested in him... for the moment.

“I asked if he'd like to help me and my friend fight a powerful old man that had soldiers bound to him by seals.” Hatake informs Orochimaru and hold up-

“I am Not about to let you attack sensei!” he yells fully intending to make a break for it the first chance he gets and warn the leaf village (well as soon as he figures out were he is anyway)

The two missing nin pause and look at him.

“Who said anything about the Hokage?” Hatake asks and Jiariya just stares at him.

Maybe it's the shock of seeing teme in a dress (and looking very fine in it-no Focus!) but he's not following.

“Who else could you be talking about when you say powerful old men with sealed soldiers? Aren't you talking about Anbu?”

“And thisss is why you'll always be an idiot.”

Jiraiya takes offence to that!

“hmm perhaps we should show him Oro-chan~.” Hatake sing songs, and no, just no.

“Please don't ever call him that again. Especially not like that.” he pleads to the scarecrow, maybe if he begs they'll have mercy on him.

Hatake's answer is to poof back into the gorgeous woman and send him an innocent smile.

This has got to be nightmare.

.

.

.

No, the real nightmare is finding out what Shimura Danzo has been doing behind sensei's back.

Chapter Text

Chapter 114 

Sakura bites back tears of frustration as a hand tangles in her long hair.

This is not how she was expecting this to go, the three of them had come so far, they should have been able to take out these arrogant Sound shinobi.

But instead they had been the arrogant one's and fell right into a trap because of it. Now Sasuke's wounded and Naruto's fighting two on one and Sakura...Sakura is back to being that useless kunoichi wanna-be.

no.

no.

NO!

She has come to far to stop now!

With a snarl she takes a kunai to her long hair (hair that she had spent years on, and hours combing out to perfection.) and cuts herself free.

She will not fail her teammates, she will not fail her new senpai, she will not fail Kakashi-sensei.

SHE! WILL! NOT!

With a bit of concentration she probably doesn't have the time for she delicately gathers chakra around her fist and swings it low into the other kunoichi's gut.

The blow doesn't take her down like she hoped but it does gain Sakura some distance and she uses it to slip past the guard of the spiky haired male and dislocate his shoulder before launching past Naruto and to Sasuke's side.

“Naruto clones!” she commands as her hands glow a faint green. She's not a fully registered medic yet, but the ladies at the hospital have been giving her extra lessons and even approved her to patch up scraped knees and once help set a broken bone.

She won't be able to fix Sasuke's deeper wounds but she can numb the pain a bit and scan him for any complications.

The scan comes back with positive for poison but Sakura doesn't have an antidote (stupid should have brought some) nor is she able to draw it out from the blood yet.

Sakura takes a deep breath centers herself and sends the enemy the glare she's been practicing in the mirror, it works better on Temari-senpai's brother than on them but Sakura is just getting started.

She pulls out her kunai and a spool of wire.

Kakashi-sensei made a barricade the first time they meet and told Sakura to run her chakra through it. It had been hard back then, she'd been scared and freshly betrayed.

Now.

Now she's practiced this technique enough that she could do it in her sleep.

She pulls Sasuke into the roots of the nearest tree and calls Naruto over while his clones hold the sound-nin back.

With quick precise hands she sets up her barricade.

Great now they have enough time to breath and regroup.

She mentally pledges to herself to take these ninja down. Nobody hurts her team.

Nobody!

Chapter Text

Chapter 115

Rasa retreats to his quarters with a tired sigh.

It's been a long week but the better relationship with Konoha means that he's more than welcome to come to leaf before the big final of the chunin exam's. It has the added bonus of easy collaboration to halt the invasion Orocimaru is planning as well.

A shift on the other side of the room has Rasa tensing, but he remains outwardly relaxed as he turns to find....a geisha? On his sofa?

Is this a bit of Konoha hospitality or an assassination attempt?

I mean it's been a bit since his wife died and he wouldn't say no to some company but he wasn't aware Konoha would provide this kind of service.

“Hello Rasa, long time no see.” the geisha says and her eyes falling crescent shapes as she smiles behind her fan.

Rasa blinks because the scene looks vaguely familiar, but Rasa cant tell why.

“Have we meet?”

“Yes as a matter of fact, I'm your favorite baby sitter”

. 

. 

. 

No.

It cant be.

Rasa finally manages to fully take in the man...woman? And wonders what fresh insanity has hit the copy-nin now. (and if he should be worried about his children coming home in kimonos with decorative fans and painted faces. Then he thinks about Temari's war fan and Kankuro's puppeteer paint and narrows his worries down to Gaara and the kimono.)

The (man? Woman?) Missing nin sits up a bit from there slouch and Rasa spends the next uncountable hours trying to wrap his brain around the fact that Hatake is working with Orochimaru and apparently the toad sage to take down a councilor who has his own shadow army of brainwasher and sealed soldiers.

All this, while trying not to stare to hard at the umm assets Hatake is currently showing off.

Sweet desert moon what had he done to deserve this?...actually he didn't want the answer to that 

By the end of the talk Rasa almost wishes it was an assassination attempt.

Chapter Text

Chapter 116

Gaara watches Temari tear a boys ear off with her teeth and thinks she would have gotten along well with the sand Bijuu.

It's kind of comforting to know that even humans are capable of such violence sometimes.

Besides if she's fighting then that means he doesn't have to. Not that he wouldn't if his siblings needed help of course, but it's nice to be taken care of.

Kankuro flinches slightly at Temari's deep growl and then again when she physically picks up her opponent and flings them into the nearest tree.

“Dang she's becoming scary.” his brother mutters but he still helps Temari clean the excess blood off her fan so it doesn't rust.

It reminds him that his siblings still cared for him too back when he would make them flinch and they feared him much more. Or maybe they feared For him instead.

Hmmm

Kankuro finds the opposite scroll on the downed enemy so they start there journey to the tower much to Temari's grumbling.

Not far from there destination a familiar, slightly blood splattered, girl comes out from the underbrush followed by a confused blonde caring a scowling dark haired boy.

“OH Senpai!” the pink one says, and Gaara thinks there's something different about her but he can't quite put his finger on it.

“What happened to your hair?” Kankuro asks and oh that's what's different.

The girl starts to glare at Kankuro but Temari interrupts with, “Oh that'll stay out of your way better hmm a bob suits you.” and suddenly that glare turns into one of the brightest happiest grins Gaaras ever seen as the pink one nearly skips to his sister.

Gaara suddenly wants something like that. Not necessarily a Kohai but someone who will smile at him just because he said something.

“Hey Hey does this mean we're walking with them to the tower?” the blonde boy asks.

“Well, we both have our scrolls so I don't see why not, I mean if that's ok with you senpai?” the pink ones says to which Temari shrugs and starts walking.

“Huh? Well ok. So who are you guys anyway? I mean I know the blonde scary chick is Temari but who are the two of you?” the boy asks and Gaara is happy to let his brother answer.

“I'm Kankuro and this is Gaara.”

“oh cool this is Sasuke,” he says with a nudge of his shoulder that his carried companion desn't seem to appreciate. “And I'm Naruto Believe it!”

Gaara nearly stops when he realizes the blond boy, Naruto, has a really nice smile.

Hmm Gaara decides he's going to ask Kakashi-sensei how to get a smiley person for himself.

Chapter Text

Chapter 117

Kakashi sat sipping on a fresh pot of tea as Jiraiya and Orochimaru have a mild scream fit at each other.

What had started out as planning for Danzo's take down ended up becoming an yelling match were accusations were thrown and the past with all its mistakes were shoved in each others faces.

“-left us like we were just-”

“-never asked me to stay and they were chil-

“-you already had the Namikaze brat was he not even enough to keep you-”

“-lost the others and-”

“-You think you're the only one who's ever experienced that kind of loss? You and Tsunade both just-”

Kakashi eyes the bindings that currently wrap the two Sanin on opposite ends of the room and decides that there still to emotionally compromised to think of releasing themselves.

“-came back-”

“-experimenting ON BABIES-”

“-was sponsored and I was compromised-”

“-oh sure it was all Danzo's fault.”

“As a matter of fact, IT WASSSSSSSS!”

Oh looks like there winding down. Kakashi takes a bite of the dango that was ordered and continues to eye the two from his safe spot near the door.

“Im sorry, I shouldn't have left you alone.”

“No you ssshouldn't have....but I forgive you.”

Kakashi watches as they both stop and lean back only now seeming to realize they've been tied up this whole time.

Orochimaru, the dear, simply undoes the knot and lets the wire spool around him.

Jiraiya just cuts through the (very expensive) ninja wire and lets it fall without a second look. Rude.

Oh look now they're hugging.

Wait are those Tears? On Orochimaru? Oh by the Sage Jiraiya has them too!

Yeah nope Kakashi has already weathered one emotionally charged outburst and played mediator for a screaming match he has already hit his emotional quota thank you.

A swirl of Kamui and he's off to check up on his precious genin.

He'll leave the sanin alone for a few hours.......maybe days.

Chapter Text

Chapter 118

Kakashi changes out of the Geisha disguise and into the blank training mask of an Anbu.

It may be a little difficult this time with the extra security for the exams but Kakashi was at this same exam in another life and knows all the protocols by heart. Plus if he fumbles a little it'll be counted as a 'rookie' mistake.

It takes no time at all to locate his genin. Both genin actually.

Apparently they entered the tower together and Kakashi feels his heart ping with joy and sadness as he watches Naruto and Gaara stumble through the beginnings of a friendship.

Then he has to blink in surprise because he could have sworn he just heard Sakura call Temari 'senpai'.

Huh.

Well, she did indeed choose a strong female kunoichi, he was just thinking that she would choose someone from Konoha. Looks like his genin can still surprise him even now.

Kakashi catches a lucky break when the Anbu Captain Panther assigns the 'Rookie' to babysit the Sand siblings.

If this had been another life a full Anbu team would have been left but sand was proving to be a valuable ally so a single Anbu to sound the alarm in case of upset was a correct idea.

Well, if the Anbu you assigned was actually an Anbu that is.

Kakashi simply signals an “Confirmed” and waits until the other Anbu have left the room,

With one more quick scan to make sure all other chakra signatures are at lest three rooms away Kakashi steps out from his hiding place and reveals himself to the genin.

All six of his pups fall into 'casual defense' stance when they register his presence and Kakashi couldn't be prouder.

“Can we help you Anbu-san?” Sakura asks.

And rather than answer Kakashi simply pulls the mask off his face.

He makes sure to catch all six of their adorable faces with his sharingan as they finally process who he is.

Ah it's good to see all his (his-his-his and nobody can take them now) pups again.

Chapter Text

Chapter 119

“Kakashi-sensei!” Temari says in astonishment.

There is no way this man actually snuck into this village like that. How did he get past the actual Anbu and-

Wait!

What had pinky and her peeps said?!

There is no way these little baby genin would be calling Her sensei Kakashi-Sensei unless....unless this is his leaf team!

No!

Those little tree huggers had been hiding under her nose the whole time!

HOW DARE THEY!

How dare they try and take Her sensei! How dare they try and take her HeadPAts!!

Oh Temari is gonna-

A hand lands between her pigtails with the same gentle ease it always does and Temari finds herself staring into Kakashi-sensei's mismatched eyes as he beams at her with a face full of pride.

“I believe congratulations are in order Temari, I know you'll make a wonderful senpai.”

Temari is gonna be the best dang senpai in the whole dang five nations.

Pinky and the peeps are hers now! And leaf can fight her on this one!

….......................................................

Naruto's not sure he likes the idea of Kakashi-sensei having another team of genin.

Yeah Sakura's happy about it but she's also got her Senpai out of the whole deal and Naruto's maybe a little jealous ok.

He looks at the other team while Kakashi-sensei gently ruffles his hair.

Temari's actually kinda cool and a bit scary, and Kankuro was nice to him, even talked with him and Sasuke all the way to the tower. Then there's Gaara who was silent the whole time but there's something about him that Naruto cant put his finger on. Something that makes him seem familiar in a way.

So yeah Naruto thinks there ok and maybe they could get along....

But does he really have to share?

Then he sees the covered smile on Kakashi-sensei's face as he looks at all of them gathered together and thinks that he will (begrudgingly) share with Suna.

But only because he notices Temari giving Sakura a head pat and he is definitely going to do something to get one of those from his fellow blonde.

….....................................................

Kankuro is kind of baffled at the latest turn of events but that kind of describes his life for the last eight months or so anyway. (maybe even before that with his father being the Kage and his brother being the jinchuriki and Temari being...well Temari)

At first Kankuro was sure Temari was about to have a fit that would put the Ichibi to shame when they found out who the leaf genin were.

But then Kakashi-sensei gave her a head pat and a smile and suddenly Temari looks ready to swear vengeance on anyone who so much as looks at her kohai wrong.

Ugh what the heck? Girls are so weird.

Then there's a hand on his head gentle enough not to jolt his puppet hood and heavy enough that he can feel the warm ...and ok yeah he'd claim a kohai and protect them from weird looks too for that look on sensei's face.

Chapter Text

Chapter 120

Sakura is so excited she could practically vibrate out of her skin!

Her senpai is Kakashi-sensei's other student! She didn't even know he had another team, much less one in another village, this is wonderful.

Sakura can't believe how lucky she was to come across her senpai that day not so long ago and ask her then and there for training.

Kakashi-sensei had looked so happy when he gave her a head pat and told her she had, “Excellent taste”

And then! And then!

Her day got even better when Temari-senpai gave her a head pat too!

Sakura can die happy now.

…..................................................................................

Gaara is a little confused but very happy.

He knew that Kakashi-sensei had another genin team, he even knew that Kakashi-sensei liked sneaking into Konoha.

For some reason Gaara just didn't think that he would see both of those things when he went to take the chunin exams.

Not that it's a bad thing, in fact Gaara is thinking its one of the best things to happen to him in a while.

Cause now he has Kakashi-sensei and his siblings (and maybe Baki-sensei) and Kakashi-sensei's other genin and that's more people than he's had in a long long time.

The head pat that he receives is just the sprinkle of rain at a desert oasis.

…...........................................................................................

Sasuke watches everything happen from the bed he'd been placed on. He wants to get up, he wants to not show weakness in front of his sensei and this new team that apparently aren't all that new.

But...

He respects (is absolutely terrified of) the fact that Sakura may actually go through with her threat of using his bones as her practice material for her bolder crushing. He saw her punch through stone to take out a sound nin ok!

The only other person he's seen do that is Gai-sensei and his crazy miniature, who lets face it are not mortal by any stretch of the imagination. (Sasuke would know, he's spent months training with them)

So he stays were he is and he waits until Kakashi-sensei sits down beside him and lets the man ruffle his hair and maybe, maybe he leans into the touch. But nobody here's gonna judge him, he saw every last one on them perk up like flowers under the sun when Sensei did the same thing to them.

Chapter Text

Chapter 121 Would you like to hear a story?

With all his pups in one place Kakashi feel more content than he has in nearly forever.

So he gathers them all close and somehow manages to shuffle all six of them, plus himself onto the bed. Much to Sasuke's disgruntlement.

He's not sure what to do at first but then he remembers Evening Rain village and the children who were delighted to hear a story.

Well Kakashi has plenty of stories to tell but there's one that might be more appreciated by the 'hidden' members of his audience, so to speak.

“Maa, once upon a time, there was a man known as the sage of six-paths.” he starts and feels Naruto and Gaara both jolt a little from were they've managed to tangle themselves together on his right side. Naruto seems absolutely delighted by their cuddle while Gaara looks confused but happy.

He wonders how the Bijuu feel about the arrangement but at least he knows he has there attention now.

So he tells the story that he heard after the great fourth war.

A story of a son who fought his mother and split the great ten-tails into nine.

A story of a father who raised nine chakra beast and two human sons.

A story of a sage who's almost been lost to history.

When he's done with the tale hours have past and the tower is now fuller with chunin hopefuls and their shadow guards. He can feel the high buzzing of uncontained chakra in the other rooms from those who've survived the forest and the deep almost absentness of the ANBU that guard them. 

Hmm speaking of the Anbu guards it about time for a shift change.

Kakashi slowly manages to untangle from his pups and place the blank mask on his face a round of head pats and he slides back into the shadows with two minutes to spare as the next round of Anbu take his place.

Well time to see if the Sanin are done being emotional yet.

Chapter Text

Chapter 122

It turns out that the sanin are indeed done throwing there emotions everywhere and are on opposite sides of the low table, ink and scrolls spread all over the place.

“Oh hey Hatake perfect timing, we've almost got a counter seal ready for trial, think you could find us a willing test subject to see how the seal works?” Jariya asks and Kakashi bounds right back out the door making a bee line for his favorite Kohai.

It's about time his dear friend got the chance to speak freely.

He comes upon the man at the old training grounds and oh look he has Sai with him.

He stays back and watches for a few minutes as Tenzo teaches the little ink user hand signs for a C-rank water jutsu. It takes only two tries for Sai to lock down the hand signs and Kakashi cant keep the smile off his face as Tenzo gently reaches out a hand to oh so slowly ruffle Sai's hair. The ink user is absolutely still the while time but his eyes are full of delight and wonder, Kakashi is even more grateful that he got the boy away from Root.

He's reluctant to end the bonding moment but well, needs must, and both of them need to get that seal off.

So Kakashi announces himself gently by walking up to them form a distance “yo”

“Ah Kakashi-senpai.” Tenzo greets back and then does a slow blink and looks around like he's expecting Anbu to jump out and attack them.

When no Anbu appear his kohai blinks again and then asks “Can I help you with anything Senpai?”

“Maa I've got someone I'd like for you to meet kohai mine, you can bring Sai along too.” he adds with a nod at the boy.

Tenzo only thinks it over for a moment before nodding “lead the way senpai.”

Kakashi doesn't know what he did to deserve such faith even as a missing nin but he swears to never let it be misplaced.

Before he leads them back he reaches out slowly and gives both ex-root nin a gentle pat on there heads.

The, by now, easy affectionate gesture sets them both at ease.

He just hopes they both stay at ease when they realize one of the people there gonna meet is Orochimaru. 

Chapter Text

Chapter 123

Orochimaru turns his head as Kakashi enters the room bringing two others with him.

“it's ok kohai I wont let him touch you.” is the strange greeting out of the copy nins mouth and Orochimaru takes a minute to realize that he is talking to the older of the two beings he's brought in. Then it takes him nearly another minute to realize who the young man actually is.

“Danzo put a seal on the Mokuton user?” he asks of Hatake and he makes sure not to stare at the brunet for long. If Hatake called the young man kohai he's probably a little protective of him and Orochimaru will not take the chance of losing Hatake as an ally just to follow up on an old experiment.

Hmm seems his thoughts are already improving if he can resist the near constant urge for a dive into science.

Orochimaru comes back into the conversation at Jiraiya's current freak out. Who knows what it's over this time. He thinks with a fond eye roll.

“-was told about the umm experiment but sensei never told me there were any survivors.”

“I personally thought you must have died after I left the village but if you were sealed away in Root then it explains a few things.” he adds after his team mate and watches the wood user try not to squirm from his spot behind Hatake.

“OROCHI-CHAN!” Jiraiya yells in outrage.

“What?”

“The poor kid is a victim of your atrocious experiments and all you have to say is that you thought he was already dead!”

“..yes?”

Honestly human interactions are tedious sometimes. Could they go back to planning Danzo's demise? Or even picking out hair ornaments? That had been fun.

“I -you- this- You could at least apologize to him and tell him why!”

Ugh he'd forgotten what it was like to have a moral compass always shouting in his ear, but fine.

“I'm sorry for the way you were treated in my care. I wasn't in my right mind at the time but I understand if you would like me to leave while you are here.” he says repeating nearly word for word something he'd said to Dan back during the war.

Tsunade had stood over him like a raging bull while he'd bowed at the man's hospital bed after a botched mission that involved mind altering chemicals, and admit ably Orochimaru was never the gentlest with his comrades.

The words seem to settle something in the room just as it did back then.

“I- I understand, a little. But I don't think I want you anywhere near me again.” the wood user says and the honesty in his voice is refreshing, so Orochimaru simply nods and stands to exit the room.

As he goes Kakashi splits off a shadow clone to go with him, it's only after the door is shut that the clone changes into the familiar female version of the same man.

“Shall we go shopping Oro-chan.” she says and well it's very sweet of Kakashi to make sure he has company.

Chapter Text

Chapter 124

Tenzo trusts his senpai.

Tenzo trusts his senpai with his life, but more important Tenzo trusts his senpai with Sai's life.

Which is the only reason he didn't fire a Wood Release straight into the snakes face when he finally realizes who the Geisha at the table is.

“It's ok Kohai I wont let him touch you.” Kakashi-senpai says and the words do a lot to let the tension out of Tenzo's shoulders because in all the years he's known the man, the copy-nin has never gone back on his word.

The world gets a little fuzzy after that because now that 'fight' has been marked out 'flight' is trying to kick in and Tenzo won't do that to his senpai, He WON'T.

But he's not sure if he can stay here with this man, this monster that still haunts his darkest dreams.

And suddenly the monster is apologizing, the mad scientist is treating him like a human. It's more than he'd ever thought he'd get, more than he realized he needed.

Then the man goes even further and offers to leave, and well, Tenzo knows were his weakness lies.

He watches the man glide out of the room as graceful as the disguise he wears.

Then watches Senpais clone follow behind and breaths a sigh of relief so deep he feels it in his bones.

“You did well Kohai.” his senpai says and the head pat that follows after is the best reward he could ask for.

Senpai has helped him face his demons before, but they were never so physically present. To know that the man will help him through it all, well his loyalty to leaf is slipping further with every monster faced.

And when the time comes, Tenzo will help his Senpai face any Demon he asks, weather they be literal monster, or ones hiding in human skin.

Chapter Text

Chapter 125

When they apply the final counter-seal to Tenzo's tongue the dark lines unravels and it all turns into a very anti-climatic spit of ink that Tenzo washes out of his mouth with a splash of tea.

“That's it?” the wood user asks and Kakashi has to agree there's got to be a catch, nothing is ever that easy.

Jiraiya disagrees claiming he's the one whos done all the hard work, of course it was easy for the rest of them.

Kakashi is about to tease the man when something foul tasting invades his mouth and he spits in out into a tea cup without thinking.

The black liquid shines back at him from with in the delicate porcelain just as Sai jerks from were he's staying in the corner.

Kakashi watches the ink drip out of the boys mouth and realizes something.

“Was that meant to destroy all the Seals?” he asks tentatively because yes it's a good thing that the seals are being destroyed but it's a bad thing in the fact that it will obviously alert Danzo of his impeding doom.

“Umm no, but if there all connected to a main seal then it might explain the reaction. Why?” the seal master asks but Kakashi doesn't get to answer before Orochimaru suddenly strides through the door with Kabuto right on his heals.

Both of them have traces of black near the corner of there mouths.

Well, it looks like their time table is moving up.

Kakashi cant keep the maniac grin off his face as he realizes that they're free.

Every man, woman, and child that has ever been silenced by Danzo is now free of his seal.

And very shortly they will be free of the man himself forever.

Kakashi is going to make sure of it.

Chapter Text

Chapter 126

Yami is just changing into his Anbu uniform when Wombat jerks to their feet and bends over the potted plant in the corner. Somebody had added it to the locker room at some point, probably in a misguided attempt to brighten up the place.

But Yami isn't concerned with that right now, in fact he's about to make a joke about Wombat being pregnant when two others in the locker room bend over to do the same.

Yami isn't the only one to notice this and see's his fellow Anbu go on high alert.

Is it poison? A seal? Are they under attack?

By who? And how?

Wait! Is this the attack that Suna was warning them about?

No it's too soon.

Before his thoughts can spiral any more Wombat straightens up and looks around the room with wide brown eyes. They raise a shaky hand to there lips and wipe away a black substance.

Poison? Tar? No his nose is telling him that it's ink.

“Wombat?” he asks softly not wanting to startle the other to badly.

“I...it's....the ..seal?” they manage to say slowly as another member twitches in the corner and spits the same black ink onto the floor.

“Seal?” Yami asks because something about this is setting his internal alarms off.

“Danzo-sama's seal.” one of the others answers and Yami is about to ask more questions when another Anbu with black staining his lips suddenly snarls and tries to attack the one who spoke.

“You will not betray Danzo-sama.”

Then Three more Anbu are jumping in and all chaos breaks lose as everyone tries to figure out who's attacking who and why.

All Yami can think about is the reports from two years ago that Captain Hound tried to release before his defection, the stacks of paperwork that decorated the T&I office until last month, and the meeting he watched where the Hokage let Danzo walk out of the room with barely a reprimand.

Somethings are suddenly adding up and Yami doesn't like the picture.

Chapter Text

Chapter 127

Pakkun knows when he's summoned that something big is about to go down.

It's the way Kakashi's chakra crackles around him as he's moved from one plain to the other. The way it sparks of an impending storm rather than it's usual gentle zing.

And if that hadn't clued him in then the vicious look on his pup's covered face would have.

Pakkun looks into the mismatched gaze, watching the Sharingan spin, as Kakashi tells him and the pack that they're going to hunt down and kill Danzo Shimura. 

Of all the crazy things Pakkun had imagined (raiding Konoha, killing the sand-sensei because his sand pup got hurt, heck, summoning the goddess of the moon to wipe out humanity) that hadn't been one of them.

Then again he didn't think there would be two Sanin behind his pup when he said it either, much less one of them cross-dressing. (And yes Pakkun did triple check to make sure he wasn't stuck in a genjustsu, you can never be too carful ok)

It takes over an hour to hunt down the old Councilor where he's hunkered down in his home, fortified with seals and what Pakkun is sure are Root nin.

It takes exactly three minutes to break down the walls and take out the guards.

Then, it takes less than a second for the Snake to stab the man in the chest with his size changing sword.

Pakkun thinks it's a bit of a let down, at first, but then Danzo has to go and get back up as he reveals his arm full of eyes....his arm full of bright red SHARINGAN eyes and, well.... it all goes down hill from there.

At least Pakkun got to rip off the man's foot once before he regenerated.

Chapter Text

Chapter 128

Danzo snarls as Kakashi Hatake rips his covered eye from his head. Shisui's old eye is not his only sharingan of course, but now he's down by two and no longer has the Kotoamastsukami.

Not that it will stop him from killing these traitors but it would have helped greatly if he could have brainwashed one of them to his cause.

Then Hiruzens braty spy master shows up and instead of helping Danzo against the missing nin he joins them.

There goes a third eye.

As the fight goes on Danzo begins to piece a few things together and the picture he's coming up with is an infuriating one.

It all boils down to Hatake.

Hatake, who, two year ago as a young Anbu Captain had been found sniffing out some unfortunate things in Root. He had gotten proof, was gathering people to his side, and well, Danzo couldn't let it stand, not for the good of Konoha.

So he sent the man into a no win situation, it wasn't hard, after all Danzo had done the same to the boys father and helped along the mans fall from grace.

Only, it didn't go according to plan, and naturally Danzo had to take care of things himself.

He remembers the way his kunai carved a slash line through the leaf headband marking the man as the traitor he was.

He remembers using the Kotoamastsukami to make Hatake focus on all the depressing things in his life, focus on how Konoha wasn't home. (And if he was lucky then Hatake would follow his old mans foot steps to his own grave.)

He remembers sending his Root ninja after him and creating a false trail of documents for Hiruzen to find.

But his Root nin did not return....just like the group he sent after the man nine months ago.

Nine months ago when Hatake Kakashi supposedly woke up on a river bank with no memory of the past two years.

Suddenly the number of blown up Root bases, missing document and the interest of the clan heads is making a worrying amount of since.

Hatake's trying to finish what he started two years ago, he's trying to end Root.

Danzo has no plans to let him.

Chapter Text

Chapter 129 A humiliating End

Kakashi dodges around Jiraiya's deadly hair and slips in beside Orochimaru and his water jutsu with lightning racing up his arm. Their team work isn't the best but with S-rank skill all of them some how manage to stay out of the others way.

Danzo takes the lightning and water combo full on causing him to sacrifice another eye. The old councilor hasn't realized yet the he has one less than he thinks he does, thanks to a quickly places genjutsu early on.

Yes Kakashi is barrowing the method his young adult Sasuke used to defeat the man in another life, but why mess with a good thing, especially since none of them can seem to yank the arm itself off Danzo.

Speaking of a good thing.

Its a good thing Kakashi can use intangibility now because Orochimaru just ran a sword through his arm to stab Danzo in the neck.

Not that he can really blame the snake, cause Kakashi's not sure he wouldn't do the same if the opportunity presented itself.

Being tentative allies as a missing nin just means you wont stab the other in the back, though apparently exterior limbs are fair game.

“You think you can defeat me like this? Two traitors and a lousy pervert--” Danzo's rant is cut off by Jiraiya yelling out to correct that he is a Super pervert, thank you very much.

Shortly followed by Orochimaru using a decorative hair pin to knock aside Danzo's wind infused Kunai.

“You think to humiliate me?!” Danzo yells at them and well Kakashi has never heard a more perfect opening in his life.

“No, this is humiliating you.” he tells the war hawk as he folds his fingers into position.

“ONE THOUSAND YEARS OF DEATH!!!!!”

…................

Somewhere in the middle of the very chaotic Anbu quarters Badger feels a chill go down his spine and makes it a priority to keep his back to the wall and protect his posterior.

Chapter Text

Chapter 130

Hiruzen knows that he forgives a lot when it comes the people he's close to, especially since those people have become so few.

But to see the evidence of Danzo's betrayal. To see his own people who were hurt and silenced.

It makes him think he forgave to much when it came to his old friend.

There's no evidence of a body now, and with Jiraiya standing in his office with not one but two of their greatest missing nin he's not going to question the 'it blew up cause of the bad seal' bit they've told him.

If one of them has the body stashed away to desecrate later....well he's not sure Danzo wouldn't deserve it at this point. Not with the things that are being placed before him.

Hiruzen feels tired.

He had thought he was serving his village, thought he had done enough, thought he had done well by his successor.

Now he realizes everything he thought was wrong.

He should have never accepted the hat again (He wonders if he truly should have accepted it in the first place.)

But he can do right by his village now.

“I am too old to run this village, I was too old when I retired. This village needs someone new.” he says and turns to his spy master and student.

The look in his eyes must convey his next words because Jiraiya cuts him off before he can go any further.

“Oh sweet sage NO! No way! Not gonna happen! Make teme do it.” the toad sage adds with a gesture in his team mates direction.

His team mate who is looking more sane and far more femininely than Hiruzen remembers only rebuffs him with, “I already run a village you baka and I've no desire to come back here.”

“what about Tsunade?” Jiraiya asks almost desperately.

“The only way she'd be a viable candidate is if we could fill her in on the latest disaster and have her here for the final stage of the chunin exams. But considering her last known location was in hot springs country I highly doubt it.”

Jiriaya then whips around to face Hatake whos been watching with an amused glint in his visible eye.

“Hatake I will write you a one of a kind Ichi ichi sweet harem novel if you bring her here.”

“Sold!” is the copy-nins reply before he suddenly swirls out of existence.

.

.

.

Well, on the bright side now Hiruzen knows how he was getting into the village undetected.

Chapter Text

Chapter 131

Tsunade stared at her winnings in dread. The pot was worth a small fortune and it made her stomach roll.

What kind of bad luck was going to befall her now, what more could be taken from her?

“Tsunade-sama are you ok?” Shizune's voice called her back to reality.

No she couldn't lose Shizune, anything else but her last connection to Dan, her last thread to reality.

She briefly wondered what kind of deal she'd have to make with the gods to keep her assistant with her, before grabbing both girl and pig and nearly sprinting out the door. Leaving her winnings behind.

Whatever was coming their way Tsunade was going to punch it into oblivion.

.

.

.

Two hours later, as her fist goes through Kakashi-copy-nin-Hatake without touching him....well that's when she knows her luck has well and truly run out.

.

.

.

Two minutes later she, Shizune and Tonton are all transported into the Hokage's office in Konoha and Tsunde knows her demons are about to catch up to her.

.

.

.

Two seconds later she notices Jiraiya and a cross-dressing Orochimaru and knows with out a shadow of a doubt that whatever happens after this will test her sanity to its limits.

.

.

.

Three days, seven meetings and a forest worth of paperwork later Tsunade finds herself with the hat on her head and a Chunin exam to finish.

She's blaming this on Hatake.

…............

Kakashi covers her face with the delicate fan as she politely sneezes behind it. She and Oro were enjoying a lovely shopping spree to celebrate their success.

Though how the two of them ended up in a conversation about hair care products with Yamanaka Inochi and Hizashi Huygga is still lost on her. But you know, whatever keeps the snake from human experimentation and mass murder.

Oh is that Itachi at the dango booth?

Chapter Text

Chapter 132

Itachi had been worried about his little brother for months and not in the usual way either.

After running into Hatake his nightmares have changed from Sasuke's dead body and accusations to Sasuke in a green jumpsuit shouting about 'youthful revenge'.

Surprisingly its these dreams that disturb him the most, after all he's gotten use to blood and death a long time ago.

So when it comes time for the Chunin exams Itachi makes his way toward Konoha intent to sneak in and lay eyes on his foolish little brother. He doesn't enter right away, merely waits for an opening to exploit.

It happens sooner than he thinks, about the time for the second task to be over. He's not sure what causes the absence of the Anbu patrol but at the moment he doesn't care.

It only takes a few hours of listening around under a disguise and he's able to find out that Might Gai is meeting his students at training ground six.

When he arrives there's a boy already there. His back is facing Itachi but the man can feel his horror growing as he realized the boy has dark hair styled into a bowl cut and a green jumpsuit even with his fading eyesight.

The terror that grows in him is indescribable, like all his fears being realized at once only they have a twist that even his own morbid imagination couldn't think up.

His inner turmoil is interrupted by Might Gai himself entering the training ground.

“Such Youthful Energy. Lee you are truly a Most Amazing Student!”

“Gai-sensei!”

“Lee!”

Wait!

Lee?!

Not Sasuke?

Oh praise the Sage.

The wave of relief that washed over him is near ecstasy.

He wonders away from the strange beings that like to call themselves human and finds himself at his old favorite Dango shop.

He's content, and the closest to happy his been in a long time.

His guard has been let down.

Which is probably why he finds himself kidnapped by two cross-dressing S-rank missing nin.

Kisame can never find out about this.

Chapter Text

Chapter 133

Kakashi probably should not have helped Orochimaru kidnap Itachi but to be fair he thought the other man would put up more of a fight.

He's not sure where the Uchiha's partner is during all this but now he's having to talk Orochimaru out of stealing the Uchiha's eyes.

“Maa Oro-chan, I don't think those eyes will do you any good.”

“Whys that Kashi-chan?”

“Well, for one he's going blind.”

“He's what?”

“Going blind, it happens when Uchiha's use there eye to much. Besides I don't think red eyes would look good with your new kimono.” He adds when the snake looks like they may take them anyway. Strangely this argument seems to work better.

“But I've strove to gain the eyes of power for years, I cant just let all that work go to wassste.”

“Hmm how about we raid Danzo's stash instead?”

“oh yesss letssss....But what should we do with the Uchiha?”

“I think he's look lovely in that fire bird kimono from Eri-chans shop.”

And thus Kakashi finds himself strolling arm in arm with a very confused and bewildered Itachi as the three of them go to raid the manor of the old war hawk dressed in drag.

Kakashi wonders if he should try to return to sanity at some point in the future.

A sudden shift in the air has his attention pulling away from his current mental crisis and on to the new presence near by.

The new presence that's all to familiar and far too close for his liking.

Kakashi grabs Orochimaru and Itachi and drags them from the main street and into the nearest shop.

.... Which turns out to be a nail salon.

It only takes a second to realize he would much rather be sitting with two other missing nin in cross dress, getting his nails done, than face Obito right now.

So that's exactly what he does, picking out a lovely red shade to match his dress and dragging the other two with him, willing or not.

Chapter Text

Chapter 134

If you'd told Orochimaru two months ago he'd be getting his nails done with Itachi Uchiha and Kakashi Hatake he'd have laughed himself silly and then used you as fodder in a cage match.

Now he admires the lovely lilac color being placed on his nails and thinks he's never been so content. He always thought power was the way to go. Always thought that the only satisfaction he would have would be the blood of his enemies on his hands, and the thrill of scientific discovery.

These last few days however he's found himself enjoying the companionship of another and getting small thrills out of finding the perfect shade of eye shadow to complement his golden eyes.

There was still blood and screaming of course (and how Danzo did scream in his final humiliation at Kakashi's hands) but he's finding that life is more than that.

It's eye opening, and makes him wonder what else he's missed.

Almost makes him want to go back to his small growing village and see just what he can do with it. Just what kind of legacy he can build.

Hmm what an experiment that will be.

….............

Kisame smirks as he sees his partner enter the inn. The Uchiha had left him in a rush and with only the vaguest of excuses.

But now with his return Kisame is going to get the truth from him. One way...or another.

He opens his mouth as Itachi sits down and then snaps it shut when he gets a good look at the younger man.

“Did you get your hair done?” he can't help but ask, and wait is that make-up on his partners face? Are his nails done?

“...Did you seriously leave me alone just to go get yourself pampered for a week?”

Itachi only humph's in response.

Chapter Text

Chapter 135

Kakashi is not at all surprised to find that his six genin have banded together to take over a training ground.

In fact the only surprise is that there are no Anbu around to monitor them.

Well, maybe he'll cut Anbu a break, they were trying to weed out the Danzo loyalist after all.

Kakashi doesn't bother with a disguise and instead walks onto the training ground like he belongs there. (If his pups are there then that IS where he belongs.)

Six sets of eyes turn and widen before various exclamations of excitement are made. The loudest by Naruto who runs over and latches his arms around Kakashi's waist in what a civilian might consider a death grip.

Kakashi gives a gentle chuckle and runs his fingers through the blondes wild hair. The rest of Kakashi's genin are shortly behind with Kankuro bringing up the rear.

He gives out a quick round of head pats and congratulates them all on getting to the final round.

“We were the Best Believe It!”

“I have no doubt you were. Now, who wants to get some training in for those finals?”

The question gains him a wave of cheers that brings a smile to Kakashi's masked face.

.

.

.

Some hours later Kakashi notices a couple wondering by their training ground.

“Maa Yamanaka-san it's good to see you again.” he greets and watches as Kaito freezes in place.

“Ah Hatake-san is that you?” the girl with him asks and Kakashi realizes the woman missing an eye looks vaguely familiar.

“It is indeed.”

“Im so glad. I never got to say thank you. If it wasn't for your help I would never have made it back to the village.” she adds a deep bow at the end and Kakashi remembers the woman outside the wall who'd only wanted to be home.

“I'm so glad you made it.” he tells her, because he is. They'd both made it home now after all.

“May I ask what brings you into the village Hatake-san?” Kaito asks, eyeing Kakashi headband, which still holds the slash across it.

“Training the pups of course.” he answers and watches Kaito blink then look across the training ground where the genin are giving it their all to pace through the katas Kakashi gave them.

“oh of course. I don't suppose anyone else knows you're here?”

“Tsunade-himi knows, I even have written permission to stay in village until the end of the exams as long as I don't kill anyone else.”

“...that's wonderful, if you'll excuse us we were planning to get some training in ourselves.” and with that Kaito and his companion scurry away.

Huff just like Kurenai and Asuma well, he'll let the love birds be.

Chapter Text

Chapter 136

Kaito Yamanaka is not thinking about the missing nin currently 'training' six children only two spaces over.

Nope not thinking about it. He is not paid enough to think about it, much less do anything about it.

If the missing nin says he has written permission from the recently instated Hokage Kaito is not going to question it.

Questioning it is what got him seven hours of over time last week when he asked about a financial discrepancy.

So no, not questioning it and not thinking about it. He'll live longer this way.

Although he will keep an ear out in case the kids yell for help, he can at least throw smoke tag their way so they can run. Maybe he'll alert an Anbu if he comes across one, but for now he's going to focus on helping Rukia with her new depth perception.

No thinking about the crazy missing nin....nope

…...

Yami takes one look at the message given to him by the Yamanaka and wants to throw his hands in the air in a fit of exasperation.

He'd thought the set up for the chunin exams was the most stressful thing he'd ever done.

This last week has proven him wrong several times over. He wants to go inform his past self that setting up security for outsiders is far easier than setting up security against your own people.

Or what he thought was his own people, Curse Danzo to the darkest pits of hell for what he's done to Konoha and her shinobi.

Frankly Hatake and his pup obsession is the least of his worries. (Captain Hound always did had a soft spot for the young genius's that were in his unit.)

He's still got over half the Anbu to clear and a chunin exam to finish and a new Hokage to keep up dated ...and sage forsaken paperwork to fill out.

Please sweet kami have mercy!

“Pardon me Anbu-san.” a voice lightly hisses out, and Yami turns from his minor melt down to see a golden eyes goddess standing on the roof next to him.

“umm yes?” he asks because well what else is he suppose to say?

“Do you know where Kakashi Hatake is by chance?” Yami blinks a bit and remembers the reports on his desk about a cross-dressing snake sage standing with Jiraiya and Hatake in the Hokage office- and nope he has enough stress already thanks.

“Training ground 39.”

“My thankss” (Orochi-freaken-maru), the lovely lady says and flutters away.

Chapter Text

Chapter 137

Orochimaru approaches the training grounds with caution but also with confidence. He doesn't want to startle his ally (maybe even his friend?) into attacking him, he saw the way the man fought against Danzo after all.

They say Hatake know a thousand jutsu, Orochimaru is pretty sure its even more than that. He saw the man use every element from E-rank spark jutsu's to S-rank land-slide ones. Not to mention whatever intangibility thing the man has going on.

(Look Orochimaru was gonna attach the arm back later promise, it was just the fastest way to lop off Danzo's head at the time)

Besides if he gets into a fight with the man he wont have anyone to go kimono shopping with now that Itachi has ran off. (Orochimaru doesn't want to admit it but helping the Uchiha find an eye shadow to match 'those' eyes had actually been delightful.)

“Maa Oro-chan what brings you out here?” the copy-nin asks at his approach, the man seems relaxed but the snake sage can see the line of tension running through the mans body. He's angled him self so that he's a solid presence between Orochimaru and the six children beyond.

“I plan to be leaving soon so I thought we might share a pot of tea before then.” he explains holding up the pot and making sure not to glance over at the children. He's not about to let the wolf under Kakashi's skin think he's a threat to the mans pups.

(He remembers Sakumo when his pregnant wife was attacked, there's a reason the man was S-rank)

Kakashi looks him over with a critical eye and Orochimaru tries to portray innocence for all of two seconds before giving it up as a lost cause. Ironically that's what makes the copy-nin relax.

Then Orochimaru is spreading out his picnic blanket and setting up his tea set.

“Hey hey Kakashi-sensei is this another friend of yours? She's as pretty as the lady in the red dress you sent.” the fourths offspring says loudly as the group of kiddos comes closer.

“hmm yes about that...” Kakashi trails off and gives a dramatic pause as all eyes land on him. Then Orochimaru sees a familiar hand sign before an equally familiar woman is suddenly standing next to him in Hatakes usual gear.

The look on all six faces has Orochimaru cackling with laughter.

Hmm if genin are this much fun maybe he should acquire a few himself.

Chapter Text

Chapter 138

Temari is trying not to gawk at her sensei and his equally pretty companion.

Trying being the key word because she can feel her jaw going slack on her again.

Oh this is not a good look in front of her kohai.

“WAIT YOU”RE THE PRETTY GEISHA LADY!!!” Naruto screams out and Temari's brain just screeches to a halt because imagining her suddenly female sensei in a GeIsha outfit is doing a lot of things to Temari's head.

When Kakashi-sensei had told her he could get into the village anytime he wanted as long as he disguised himself this was not what she had in mind.

She was thinking about someone who would be over looked or not stand out.

Not things like 'borrowing' and Anbu uniform or dolling up like a Geisha.

Temari's so lost in her own head that she doesn't even realize there's a conversation going on around her until Kankuro starts shrieking beside her.

“WHAT DO YOU MEAN THATS OROCHIMARU!??????”

And there goes Temari's brain again.

…............

Sakura is trying her best to be calm and collected like her Senpai.

Temari had barely twitched after Kakashi-sensei's sudden transformation and only the slightest widening of her mouth had given anything away.

Sure Gaara has all of them beat in the poker face department but Temari is Sakura senpai and she's even cooler than Sasuke.

Sasuke whos currently gaping like a fish at Orochimaru-sama.

Sakura gives an internal sigh, guess it's up to her again to once again be the diplomatic one, but first,

“Orochimaru-sama I love your eyeshadow, where did you get that shade from?”

…............

Kankuro has no idea how he ends up in a conversation about the tips and tricks of Shinobi grade makeup with a friken cross-dressing s-rank nin but he's blaming it on Pinky.

And maybe Kakashi-sensei for being sort of friends with the guy...girl? Person?

Whatever.

He cant believe what's his life has become now.

He wouldn't trade it for anything. Because, he sees Gaara's lips tip up the slightest bit when Naruto smiles at him. He sees the way Temari sits straighter and glows when Sakura looks at her. He sees the pride and joy in Kakashi-sensei eye when he watches all of them.

He sees it all and wonders if he's strong enough to keep it.

Chapter Text

Chapter 139

Kakashi waves goodbye to Orochimaru as the snake heads off in a flutter of silks and purple eyeshadow.

Then cancels the Sexy-jutsu and shoos his genin (his-his-his) back to their katas.

Five of them go.

Kakashi turns his head to look at the one remaining.

“Kankuro-chan?” he asks. It's curious, in another life he barely spoke to the puppet master unless there was a joint mission involved, now he considers the boy one of his genin (one of His pups!).

“I..well...that is...”

“Just say it Kankuro-chan.”

“I'm falling behind! I'm the weakest one here.”

“You're not weak.” Kakashi says trying to cut him off but Kankuro has already descended into a half panicked rant.

“I mean Naruto and Gaara are both jinchuriki” (Kakashi wonders when they found that out) “And Sakura and Temari are terrifying konoichi” (Very true Kakashi heard about what Sakura did to the sexist grass nin) “And Sasuke has his clan eyes and lightning. But me?

All I am is a puppeteer and not even a great one, I'm average.” the poor genin folds in on himself after that so Kakashi goes down to his knees to look the boy in the eyes.

“I don't think you're just an average puppeteer, right now you're comparing your skills to those in a different area than you and that's not fair to yourself or them. You have an amazing talent for multitasking, you have enough chakra control to rival most medics, and I've seen the poisons you're making, they could be deadly one day. But, If you're worried about only being a puppet master why not try branching out, maybe try being a medic nin-”

“Sakura's already gonna be a medic and she's way better than I'd ever be.”

“Sakura is also gonna be in Konoha not Suna and while Gaara may have a bijuu Temari doesn't and plenty of your teammates in the future will be more mortal than not as well.”

“It's not about the future or those teammates, its about these ones. I d-don't fit in with them.” the misery on the boys face is pretty clear. Though Kakashi may have idea what the actual problem is here and its not just about being the weakest.

“You don't need to change who you are Kankuro, not for your siblings, not for team seven and certainly not for me. You're still growing, still learning, and one day I know you'll make an amazing ninja.”

“Y-you really think so?”

“I know so.” Kakashi answers with the conviction of a man who'd witnessed just what this puppets master did in the fourth war.

He knows that Kankuro will be a truly formidable ninja. He knows that he will have a place at Gaara's (the future Kazakage's) side. He knows that a whole new generation of Puppet masters will look up to this young boy one day.

Oh no were those tears in Kankuro's eyes? Dear Sage he HATES emotional conversations!

Chapter Text

Chapter 140

It isn't until the genin have been run through all their paces and are splitting up for the day that Kakashi realizes he needs to have one more emotional conversation.

A very important one at that.

So with a deep internal sigh and a reminder that he will do anything (ANYTHING) for his pups, he calls Sasuke over to him.

“We need to have a talk.” he starts with and the little Uchiha's shoulders go so stiff.

Ugh this is why he hates emotional conversations he always messes them up.

Kakashi kneels in front of his pup and gently tilts Sasuke's head so that he can look in his eyes.

“You didn't do anything wrong.” he tells the boy and gives himself an internal pat in the back when the tight shoulders relax a little.

“But there are some things I need to tell you about your clan, and your brother.” Oh look the stiff shoulders are back.

“Would you like your team with you? Or would you rather us go alone?” Kakashi asks when he notices Sakura and Naruto at the very edge of the training ground.

“....My team..” Is Sasuke's soft reply. Kakashi gives his shoulder a little squeeze and hopes it gives him the reassurance he needs.

The four of them end up in Naruto's apartment because Sakura's parents don't need to see her with a missing nin and the Uchiha district hardly seems appropriate.

Kakashi sits in the chair to the side and talks.

He talks about what the clan was up to with their coup, he talks about why they thought it necessary.

He talks about Shisui's death and Itachi's impossible choice, he talks about him being a spy right now.

He talks about Danzo and the roll he played in everything, he talks about his own time with the man and his almost assassination of the third.

He talks and talks and talks.

All the while the three remain silent.

When he finally does stop the sun has long gone down and his mouth his dry. Sasukes has a white knuckled grip on his teammates who only look at him with worry.

Its a long time before any of them speak, though Naruto does squirm in the silence he doesn't break it.

“Is..is he dead? The man who ordered the d-death of my clan?” Sasuke asks and its so low Kakashi's hearing has trouble picking it out.

“Yes. It took the help of two Sanin but I made sure of it.” he tells his student firmly.

“What about the eyes? The ones you said were in his arm, and any others, do you know what happened to them?”

Kakashi opens his mouth to explain that he raided the eyes with Orochimaru and Itachi but stops because he just now realizes that between the nails, hair and makeup the three of them had never actually gotten to a Root base.

Well, at least he can present them all to his student now.

Chapter Text

Chapter 141

Sasuke leans into his teammates and tries to process everything he learned this afternoon.

His clan was traitors, his brother was following orders, His enemy is Dead.

Dead at the hands of his sensei.

Sasuke isn't sure how to feel about all this but he knows how he feels about his sensei, and about his team.

He knows he would do just about anything to protect the ones who have become his precious people. He knows (now without a shadow of a doubt) that his sensei would do anything to protect him.

He absently wonders if there's any way he can show the man how thankful he is, it's not like the man needs anything and what he wants he can get at the drop of a hat. He IS a missing nin after all.

But speaking of missing nin.

“Will Aniki be coming home, now that the Councilor is dead?”

“Probably not, he's still on an undercover assignment after all but he can drop by and visit. He likes checking in on you from time to time.”

“Aniki doesn't check on me.” Sasuke denies immediately, after all he's never seen his big brother anywhere.

“Of course he does Me and Oro-chan ran into him a few days ago.”

“WAIT REALLY?” its probably the most emotion Sasuke has shown since the massacre but he cuts himself a break after all the information he's learned in one day.

“Yes I thought he and Oro-chan would never find the right eyeshadow.”

“.....” Sasuke's takes several minutes to reboot at that statement.

He knew Oro-chan was the snake sanin who was apparently his sensei's cross dressing buddy but now he has the image in his head of Itachi in a dress and after everything else he's learned today …..well ….

Sasuke decides he is done, just done, so he drags his teammates to Naruto's small bed and shoves himself between them. He needs comfort and if Gaara, who can wipe A-rank enemies off the map, can ask for a hug then so can he.

A large hand hesitantly cards fingers through his hair and Sasuke pears up to see Kakashi-sensei looking down at them.

“Sleep tight pups I'll guard you tonight.” he says and Sasuke puts everything out of his mind to deal with it tomorrow.

Tonight he's getting team cuddles and headpats and letting his sensei guard him.

Its the best sleep Sasuke has gotten since he was seven years old.

Chapter Text

Chapter 142

The next morning Kakashi stuffs his pups full with a hardy breakfast. He may have needed to summon Pukkun to get instructions but the food is only slightly burned and the genin eat it without complaint so Kakashi's calling it a win.

Kakashi needs to get the eyes before the ANBU get their act together and find them. He probably need to talk to Tsunade about one thing or another. He needs to check in on the sand sibs and Baki as well.

But he doesn't want to leave his genin (pups pups HIS pups) alone after last night. His skin may be crawling with all the emoting they're doing but they're still his pups and he'd do anything (ANYTHING) for them.

Maybe there's a competent adult who's emotionally invested in his pups and also mentally balanced enough he can leave them for a few hours.

Hmmmmm

Tenzos out because he sucks at emotions about as much as Kakashi. Baki is out because he's sand and also Kakashi has to talk with him.

Gai is out because ...well it's Gai. He cant leave them with any of his old Anbu because they're all currently over worked or under investigation.

Hmm...

A picture on the wall catches his attention.

Ah Iruka is the perfect solution. He's emotionally invested in Kakashi's pups and he may have a bit of a temper but only if you threaten kids or are late on paper work. Neither are things Kakashi has to worry about.

So he splits off a shadow clone and sends Pukkun with it to help track the teacher down. Its the chunin exams so school shouldn't be in (maybe?).

His shadow clone appears not fifteen minutes later with the shouty teacher in toe.

“I found him walking down the street, I think he was going home to do some grading.” his clone informs him as he passes him a stack of what must be test papers. Then the clone disappears in a poof of smoke, a feral looking Iruka standing near with a drawn kunai like he's two seconds from pouncing on Kakashi himself.

He is saved from being maimed by Naruto popping his head around the corner.

“Iruka-sensei? What are you doing here?”

“Naruto!” the chunin exclaims before rushing over, already checking the boy over for bumps and bruises.

“Iruka-sensei is going to watch you while I take care of a few things.” Kakashi explains and then speeds out of there before the chunin can correct him.

And before the rest of the genin can make their way into the room. Kakashi has had enough emotions for the next few YEARS thank-you-very-much.

He really doesn't want a teary goodbye on top of everything else.

Chapter Text

Chapter 143

Gai dodges Neji's attack and then swipes his genins legs from under him.

“A Youthful attempt My Young Student!” he exclaims happy to see the improvement in his charge.

Speaking of improvement he wonders how young Sasuke is doing right now.

He'd seen the young boys fight against the Sound genin and felt so proud of how far the boy had come.

Though Gai most certainly couldn't take all the credit in that regard, certainly not when he's seen the boy use Kakashi's signature lighting jutsu.

He's recently heard about his rivals daring cross-dressing and while he never thought his rival might have such a preference before it certainly opens more opportunities for challenges.

Perhaps a nail painting competition? Or see who can make the most elaborate hair style? He'll have to brush up on the latest fashions for a runway challenge.

He should talk to Anko or Kurenai about makeup ...oh and bring his students, it may benefit Tenten more as the groups sole female but Neji has the natural grace and (somewhat unyouthful) attitude to easily pull it off. Lee of course will get there simply from shear hard work.

….......

Iruka sits and listens as Sasuke Uchiha goes through every range of emotion the human body can contain.

There's nostalgia and joy for his brother and his clan, for his team and for the 'sand siblings?'

There's confusion, disgust and rage for what his brother did, for what his clan did, for what the Hokage did.

There's denial and grief for the coup d'etat and how far his clan was pushed.

There's sorrow and acceptance for how things ended.

There's joy and hope for a brighter future.

There's the rest of team 7 cuddled up on the couch as he does what he always does to sooth a crying child.

He hugs them close and wipes there tears ….and inside promises that the next time he stabs Hatake he'll make sure its not a clone.

Curse that man.

It's not that Iruka wouldn't help take care of an emotional child, its that he's pretty sure 90% of this information is classified and Iruka doesn't know half of what's going on between Sasukes tears, Narutos interspersed shouting and Sakuras partial telling of events.

Definitely stabbing Hatake again, he doesn't care what Kaito says about ticking off S-rank missing nin.

Especially when that missing nin currently has Iruka's paperwork held hostage!

Chapter Text

Chapter 144 (Ready or Not)

Kakashi makes good time getting the eyes and warping the whole lab space into Kamui before booking it out of there.

Then he manages to talk with both Rasa and Baki by dropping in on their meeting. He gives them a small debrief of what went down with Danzo and tips about distracting Orochimaru if he's ever spotted near Suna. (The puppet masters wear full face so it shouldn't be a problem to find makeup)

He also exchanges his newly finished romance novel for one of Baki's and has a lovely conversation about the 'Love Among the Shinobi' series. The author is obviously civilian with how they write fight scenes and the mistakes when using hand signs for jutsu. But the drama is well written and the umm passionate scenes are good as well.

Personally Kakashi is rooting for Mikasa and Hitoshi to get together.

He checks in on Tenzo and Sai, who are both working on written reports frt the lady Hokage. He gives them permission to say whatever they want about him and a few head pats a piece before heading to the tower.

Half way there the air twists in front of him forming a familiar spiral that has Kakashi's heart sink in dread.

He's not ready.

He's not ready to look in Obito's face and see a familiar stranger.

He's not ready to face the past were his friend was twisted into something so unrecognizable.

He's not ready to pretend he doesn't know who the man behind the mask really is.

The spiral disappears and in it's place stands a figure wearing a black cloak ….there are no red clouds and no spiral orange mask.

Kakashi feels as if time stands still for a moment. A moment to see Obito's face, a moment to take in red red eyes, a moment when his once friend opens his mouth...

“WHERE THE HECK HAVE YOU BEEN BAKASHI????” Obito yells at him and Kakashi can only gap.

“Wh-what?”

“I'VE BEEN TRING TO TRACK YOU DOWN SINCE WE GOT HERE MONTHS AGO!!!”

WHAT???

Chapter Text

Chapter 145

Kakashi stares at the mismatched man before him with hope and terror warring in his chest.

“Obito?”

“What?”

“You're dead.”

“.....” the stare that follows is one that searches deep into Kakashi's soul.

“What's the last thing you remember?” the man asks.

“Umm..” the stare continues, Kakashi wonders if this is a trick question.

“I was heading to talk to the Lady Hokage?”

“Not right now you idiot! What's the last thing you remember before waking up here?”

oh

“The Forth Great War.” he answers with pain, he still remembers the look on his students faces. He remembers the justu tearing through his flesh and 'knowing' he was going to die. He remembers watching so many others fall before him, the world a barren waste land.

“ok yes and?” Obito practically demands dragging Kakashi away from the memory.

“umm and the goddess k-killed you....then m-me.” He's not sure what he expects as the response but its not Obito face palming and muttering about idiots with amnesia. When the other man is done with his little fit he faces Kakashi again.

“ok so you don't remember anything about Sakura using edo-tensei and bringing back a Mini undead army?”

“umm no.”

“And you remember nothing about the Uzushio seal?”

“also no.”

“How about the Kamui malfunction?”

“Definitely not.”

There's another deep deep sigh.

“Ok so you remember nothing useful and are essentially useless to me.” his friend (friend? Yes friend) dead pans at him.

“I wouldn't say i'm completely useless, I mean look I prevented the evasion of Konoha and made Orochimaru into an ally and team 7 is still together too so there.”

“yes wonderful job that.” his friend dead pans again but kakashi couldn't care less.

Obito is here.

Obito is here and he's the one that Kakashi remembers.

The one who fought with him against a goddess, the one who nearly killed him for the moon eye plan, the one who gave him his eye on what was almost his death bed.

This is HIS Obito and Kakashi nearly wants to hug the man he's so happy right now.

Instead he reaches out and ruffles the dark locks on his friends head.

“...Bakashi.”

“Yes?”

“Stop that.”

“hmm nope.”

There's a third deep sigh.

Chapter Text

Chapter 146

Kakashi takes Obito to lunch at Kabuto's favorite tea place and catches up on things with his not-so-dead friend.

Apparently they are indeed in an alternate universe. Obito theorizes that it was a combination of a malfunctioning Kamui and a faulty Uzushio seal that did the work.

They have essentially taken over the bodies of there counterparts and there's no way back home. Which is very depressing but Obito says they won the war and killed the goddess. Kakashi's first genin are able to take care of themselves and others now, they'll be just fine. He'll miss them but he knows that the world was better when he left so it doesn't hurt as much as it could. Besides his has pups to train here who are just now growing into their fangs.

Obito also informs him that he no longer has to worry about Madara, and Pain is being persuaded away from world take-over after Nagatos not-so-consensual revival so Akatsuki will be done soon. The seal over Obito's heart is also gone, but his friend refuses to say how he did it.

Zetzu escaped from Obito's first ambush, but not before getting set on fire a little bit and the statue was placed in kamui so no evil plants can get to it.

Kakashi tells Obito about waking up in the river bank with no memory and finding his way from there. He tells him about the caravans and meeting Gaara. He tells him about his genin both sand and leaf. He tells him that he defeated Danzo with Orochimaru and Jariya.

And he must be affected by all the emotions going around these days because he tells his first friend about how he woke up lonely and lost in a world that was not his own. He confides his struggle not to get so close to his genin before throwing that plan out the window and claiming them for his own. And finally he cries when he tells Obito that he's so glad he's not alone in this....alone with the memories, alone in the fight with a goddess, alone in a new but so familiar world.

Kakashi startles a little when a calloused hand settles into his hair and drags gently along his scalp.

Ah so that's why team 7 loves head pats so much.

Chapter Text

Chapter 147

Kakashi takes a few minutes to enjoy his own head pat before looking up to his friend.

“What now?”

“Now I hunt down Zetsu and we kill the evil plant.”

“How do you plan on tracking him down?”

“Through trial and error. Well, unless you wanna come along?”

Kakashi's first instinct is to say yes, his second is to think of his pups. Because they are pack now and it's time to admit it.

“Maa the Exam finals are coming up next week and I promised the pups I'd be there.” Kakashi says instead.

Obito blinks at him for a second but shrugs his shoulders and sips his tea.

“Suit yourself, I can always kamui to you when I find the parasite.”

“Of course, I'll stock pile weapons and supplies in kamui for now as well, they might come in handy.”

“...right, speaking of stack piling, wanna tell me why my dimension is filled with sharingan eyes?”

“Ah that.”

“Yeah, That.”

The rest of their meeting is Kakashi telling Obito what happened with Itachi and Orochimaru and the grand adventure of not actually getting the eyes.

“I'm sorry you all went to a nail salon?”

“It's very relaxing you should try it, or get your hair done, the retired ninja at the 'Kunai's Kut' are very friendly.”

“I'll pass thanks.”

Kakashi hears what Obitos been up to which mostly involves manipulating some people and killing others.

But with evening meal approaching Kakashi decides to head back to his genin. He reluctantly says goodbye to Obito, who gives him a friendly shoulder bump and rolls his eyes.

“Honestly Bakashi I'll be fine, go watch your pups.” his friend says softly before whirling away.

As Kakashi heads to Naruto's apartment he stops at Ichiruka's to order some to-go ramen and smiles under his mask at the fact that they pay no attention to his slashed head-band.

Naruto is almost as excited to see the ramen as he is to see Kakashi, but Iruka does try to stab him a few times throughout the evening. The man only subsides after Kakashi returns his paperwork, slightly rumpled but still in order.

Then they're both distracted when Sakura asks if he can show them justus to check for poison's.

Kakashi is more than happy to oblige his little pack.

Iruka still looks like he wants to put a kunai threw Kakashi's other eye.

Chapter Text

Chapter 148

Sasuke has a bit of a problem.

He wants to thank the people who helped take down the Uchiha's greatest enemy.

He wants them to know that he is grateful for their help and he will try to repay the debt he owes.

Kakashi-sensei said there was no debt between them but Sasuke doesn't see it that way. The man saved him and his team when they were nearly sold to Cloud. He taught them justsu and katas and brought them gifts, claiming them as his own. He brought them allies and gave them headpats and helped Sasuke with his Sharingan.

He told Sasuke the truth behind his clan, behind the massacre, behind his brothers actions.

He killed Sasukes enemy. (His True enemy.)

There is near nothing that Sasuke would not do for the man who is his sensei.

But Kakashi claims to not want anything, to not need anything.

It's frustrating at first but then Naruto of all people points out what Kakashi wants the most.

His teacher wants to come home. Home to konoha.

Sasuke decides he will do everything in his power to make that happen. Even if it means helping Naruto get that blasted hat.

There are still two others he needs to thank but they are much easier it seems.

The toad sage enjoys writing his books and ...well the pleasure of a beautiful woman. Sasuke is sure he can simply pay one of the night girls for her umm services.

The snake sage he's actually meet and while he's sure make-up will go over well he doesn't trust himself to find the right kind (Sakura and Temari had a thirty minute debate with Kankuro over the right brand of ninja grade cover up ok. It was mildly terrifying.) So instead he hunts down a kimono from one of the old clan members with a deep purple color he's hoping will complement the snakes pale skin tone. (or whatever it is that detail orientated femininity people like. Should he be learning this stuff for Itachi too?)

He also thinks about a medical book that Sakura found when they were digging around that has information on the sharingan eyes.

Kakashi-sensei tells him that Oro-chan will love both and the female friend is a lovely idea for Jariya. He even introduces Sasuke to an older boy named Kabuto who can find just the right woman for the job.

Chapter Text

Chapter 149

It's while Sasuke is talking to Kabuto's lady friend that he realizes he needs to have a talk with his brother.

He loves his brother, he never stopped loving his brother, and maybe that's why it hurt so much. Itachi didn't just kill the clan but he left Sasuke alone.

Alone and without him.

So he's still mad at Itachi, but he also wants his brother back in his life.

It's complicated.

He doesn't know what to do about this and debates bringing it up to his teammates. Unfortunately his debating is cut short by Naruto barreling through Sasuke's thinner than ever emotional barrier and dragging the problem out of him.
Naruto obviously doesn't know what to do about this so he physically drags Sasuke to Sakura to ask.
Which would only be a little problem if she wasn't training with Temari who just so happens to have Gaara and Kankuro with her.

Huff just add the Sensei's and Sai and the whole mismatched pack would get to hear about Sasuke's issue. (He's been talking to the ninken to much if he's referring to their group as a pack.)

It's surprisingly the older sand siblings who helps him feel ok about not feeling ok.

“I mean I get were you're coming from, I thought Gaara was gonna kill me, and I was terrified of him, but that didn't mean I stopped caring about my little brother you know.” is Kakuro's words on the subject.

“I was suppose to protect him, that's what mom said, I was the eldest I was suppose to help look after my little brothers. But then Mom died and Gaara was taken away and I only saw him for the first time when he was insane and killing people. I was torn. This was my little brother, but I also saw him as a monster. I thinks it's ok to fear someone, to fear FOR them and love them, it's ok to be angry at them, to hate them and love them. Emotions are what make us human.”

Yeah, they were, ….man it sucked being human sometimes, can he go back to an avenger now? Emotions suck.

But this doesn't answer the question about what he's suppose to do about Itachi, so he asks the group as a whole.

“Maybe you could get him a gift as a piece offering? And then you could talk to him and tell him that you want to mend things but that you're still hurt over what happened.” is Sakura's suggestion.

Maybe he will get his brother a gift, it seem like a starting point.
Does Itachi like kimono's? Maybe he should just get him make-up? But what kind?

Didn't Kakashi-sensei say Oro-san helped find the right eyeshadow?

Chapter Text

chapter 150

Kakashi is at first mildly alarmed and then greatly amused when Sasuke comes to him with a request to contact 'Oro-san' for a bit of help.

Kakashi's first thought is of a different time line, with a different Sasuke who left his team to seek Orochimaru's 'help'.

Then Sasuke explains that he's looking for a gift for Itachi and Oro-san had been the one to find the right eyeshadow so maybe the snake sanin wouldn't mind helping him find some lipstick or something?

Kakashi does not bust out into hysterical laughter.....but its a very close call.

He calmly offers to send Pukkun as a messenger if Sasuke doesn't mind paying the ninken back with a nice cut of meat.

His adorable pup agrees and then asks if he should offer to pay the Snake sanin for his services.

“Do you know what Oro-san would like as payment?”

“Hmm well he'd love a pair of those sharingan but th-”

“He can have great aunt Kigome's, that woman was snobbish cheek pincher who blamed Itachi for Shisui's death.”

“Ah, ok then, I'm sure Oro-chan will be absolutely delighted to help you.”

“Thanks Kakashi-sensei.”

“Oh it's my pleasure pup.” he tells the genin with an added headpat for good measure. Sasuke even shuffles closer and leans into his side at the gesture.

Kakashi summons Pukkun and the little pug is actually happy to take the note to the sanin. When Kakashi asks why his oldest companion responds with, “I know the snake sage is kinda crazy but it's been so long since you had friends... I was getting worried about you.”

Kakashi wonders why Pukkun isn't more worried about his cross-dressing with an s-rank mad scientist but... well Kakashi's not sure he actually wants the answer to that question really.

Chapter Text

Chapter 151

Tsunade sits in the box above the stadium looking down on chunin hopefuls with exasperation.

Six of the eight finalist had been reported by various people to be in the company of Tsunade's biggest headache.

AKA Copy-ninja Kakashi Hatake.

She thought granting him permission to stay in the village would be an easier way to keep track of him. Especially considering the man can apparently disappear into thin air at will and take others with him.

The plan had worked of course...just not how Tsunade had thought it would.

It was indeed easier to keep track of the man. In fact Tsunade got several reports from various sources stating where he was at multiple times.

It was the way these reports came in that gave her the headaches.

A shakily written report from a Yamanaka was the easiest of them. Dealing with overwhelmed ANBU (one of which broke down in her office) and a shouty Chunin school teacher, was not how she expected to gather news about the infamous copy-nin.

Speaking of the shinigami, Tsunade thinks as she watches the world swirl not 2 feet away from her to spit out the new bane of her existence.

“Hatake, what do you think you're doing here brat?” she asks sharply, and has to keep her eye from twitching when one of her Anbu in a badger mask switches places with a potted vase to put his back to a wall. Come to think of it, isn't that the Anbu that has a break down in her office?

Not important right now.

“Yo, I'm here to join the section for the students sensei.” the announce says and Tsunade can't help the absolute dry look she sent his way.

“Oh? For which side?” she asks sarcastically motioning to the section below were Baki is clearly sitting on the other side of the booth from the leaf teachers.

Hatake, the utter brat, ignores her all together and jumps down to join them. With absolutely no interference from her cowering ANBU.

It's so hard to find good help these days.

Chapter Text

Chapter 152

Asuma is startled and wary when Hatake drops into the jonin-sensei box and greets them all with a cheery hello.

He's already pulled a few kunai out of his weapons pouch when Tenzo greets the missing nin with a “Ah Hello Senpai, I'm glad to see you made it, the saplings will be excited that you're here.”

Before Asuma can even process the fact that Tenzo is apparently a bit of a traitor, Gai leaps in with an overly loud, overly youthful hello and even the sand shinobi steps closer with a greeting of his own.

The conversation there after devolves from the exams to romance novels of all things.

Asuma spends the next ten minutes trying to break out of the obviously elaborate genjutsu, before giving it up as a lost cause when biting his thumb doesn't work. Besides its Shikamaru's turn in the arena and he's up against the Kazakages daughter.

His student at least puts on a decent show, but in the end surrenders to the konichi. Asuma huffs and amused sigh around his cigarette at his students laziness. Then he tilts his head toward the sand jonin and gives the man a nod to show his acceptance of the situation, it only seems polite. And Asuma has no need or will to rock this strange peace that's fallen over their little booth.

The next match is the Haruno girl verses one of the kazakages boys, the puppeteer if he's not mistaken. The boy looks a little nervous to be in the ring with Haruno and after her showing at the preliminaries Asuma doesn't exactly blame him.

That poor genin will never underestimate a konoichi again that's for sure.

Hatake, Tenzo and the Sand jonin (what was his name again?) all boost a bit about the two genin, Tenzo and Baki lightly ribbing each other about their respective students and Hatake cheering both them and the two genin on.

Gai on the other hand seems ecstatic over the whole thing and announces that the two teachers should become rivals.

Asuma feels his headache growing and decides another smoke will help calm his nerves.

Then he prays to the sage that the exam will be over soon and his life can go back to normal.

Chapter Text

Chapter 153

Kakashi couldn't help let out a little chuckle as Kankuro managed to pull a win over Sakura and look so surprised by it.

Sakura takes her loss with a bit of a grumble but formed the seal of reconciliation with the baby puppet master before they leave the arena.

Kakashi lets out another chuckle when the two join the others in the competitors box and Sakura receives a headpat from Temari. The little rosette  beams at her senpai and Naruto looks a little jealous in the background.

But the blonde doesn't have long to sulk as he is called next to fight against Neji, the only one of Gai's students to make it to the finals.

Speaking of Gai...

The man may think it's a bit unyouthful to take bets on his own student but if worded as a challenge the man will except nearly anything.

The Challenge which he looses just as Neji looses the round. The young Hyuga seems to be in a bit of a daze when Naruto is announced the winner but still accepts the blonds seal of reconciliation. Though admitably the concussion he received may be messing with his perception of things.

Naruto himself doesn't seem to be paying much attention to the crowd and is instead bouncing back to the competitors booth and looks to be hounding Temari for a headpat.

Much to Kakashi's amusement and Temari's bewilderment.

Kakashi cant help but smile as Naruto glows with happiness when she ruffles his messy hair.

Now Sakura looks to be getting a bit jealous over there. Hmmm maybe Kakashi will pop in on all his little puppies and give out headpats for all their hard work.

Oh speaking of hard work, it looks like Sasuke and Gaara are up.

Kakashi leans forward on the railings curious as to where this fight will go. After all neither boy are the same ones who he saw standing in this same arena in another life.

Chapter Text

Chapter 154

Sasuke takes a moment to catch his breath after running around the arena avoiding Gaara's sand.

He never realized how annoying those tiny grains were until now.

But despite that he's having fun. FUN.

There's no reason he really has to win, no enemy he has to defeat, no worries about a looming future. Sasuke wonders when the last time he was this at peace was.

Probably before he joined the academy and his dad started comparing him to Itachi.

But he throws that thought away and jumps full throttle back into the fight, a small smile tugging at his lips.

Hours later when the dust is settled and the exam is over Sasuke isn't even a little made that he tied with the red head.

And when Kakashi-sensei shows up to drag them all off to a picnic...well it seems like a good way to end the chunin exams.

.

.

.

Sasuke looks over to Gaara whose head is propped on sensei's knee as the man looks through a kinoichi magazine with Sakura and Temari. Kankuro occasionally peeks over to add his two yen on some lady's makeup and Naruto is laying nearly across Gaara making himself part of the conversation as well.

Sasuke turns his head to see Tenzo-sensei and Baki-san trading books on the other corner of their giant picnic blanket and Sai is a few feet away presumably drawing everyone from the way he's constantly looking up and down.

He must be finishing up because not a minute later Sai approaches his side of the blanket and shows him the sketch he's been working on. A good likeness all in all.

“hn nice.” he tells the other boy and blinks a bit as Sai replies with a thumbs up.

Sasuke himself hadn't realized he'd copied the gesture until Sai started repeating it back to him. It's not really the worst thing he could have unconsciously copied from Gai-sensei and his miniature.

(Sasuke tries not to imagine himself in a green jump suit with a bowl cut. At least he probably would have noticed that transformation.)

Besides it always makes people do a double take when they see him giving one to team Gai. One anbu even tripped on a roof tile. (Sasuke is so glad Kakashi-sensei taught him the art of trolling.)

With a smile on his face Sasuke lays back against the ink user who's currently receiving a nice headpat for his artistic efforts. Yeah, a picnic was a great way to end the exams.

Chapter Text

Chapter 155

Kakashi meets Orochimaru at Kabuto's favorite tea house the next morning. The copy nin is rather glad the other men decided to meet with him first instead of going straight to Sasuke.

“Good Morning Oro-chan” he greets in full Geisha attire.

“Good Morning to you as well Kashi-chan. Is that a new Kimono?”

“It is thank you for noticing. I picked it up at Saki-chan's shop, you remember where we got that lovely outfit for Tachi-chan.” Kakashi takes a small pleasure in their greeting, taking time to order tea and compliment Orochimaru on his new accessories and outfit as well.

“Yes the kimono was actually a gift from Sasuke-chan for helping avenge his clan I believe.”

“Oh I remember the puppies telling me about that now, Sakura helped him pick it out, apparently the poor boy has no fashion sense.”

“Is that why he needs help picking out a gift for his brother?” the slightly bewildered look on the others face says he's more confused about that than he lets on.

Kakashi was confused about it to at first, but he supposes that if he got the chance to connect with someone he cared about, even if they hurt him, he'd take the chance to. (His father and the suicide comes to mind. Kakashi knows it was meant to help but it left him alone...much like sasuke probably felt then. Yeah Kakashi can understand his student better than he thought.)

Before Kakashi can decide if he wants to explain any of this to Orochimaru or not the corner of the room begins to twist.

“Don't worry he's a friend of mine.” is all he has time to say before Obito pops out of kamui clearly distracted by something because he gets half way through a sentence before interrupting himself.

“Ok so I have the trap seals set up and Zetsu is---What the Heck are you wearing?”

“A kimono” Kakashi answers with a sip of tea to hide his grin.

“...why?”

“Because I look dang good in it.”

“Indeed you do Kashi-chan” Orochimaru adds in, also sipping his tea.

“What? is that Orochimaru?”

“Yes he likes looking good in kimonos too”

“.....I'm not insane enough for this. Are you ready to kill Zetsu or not?”

Kakashi in a very unlady like fashion gulps down the last of his tea in one go.

“Ready.”

“Oh leaving so soon?” Orochimaru almost looks sad at his departure.

“You can come with if you like, were going to set one of your old colleges on fire.” he invites just to be polite.

“I'd be delighted to join you.” the snake responds and Obito throws his hands in the air in exasperation.

“Ya know what the more the merrier! Lets just go!”

And with a burst of Kamui they're all gone.

Chapter Text

Chapter 156

Orochimaru despite his rank as a Sanin, despite his status as a Kage, despite his abilities as a near immoral finds himself mostly in the side line position as the two younger men tear the landscape and the creature known as Zetsu apart.

They both phase in and out of existence, sometimes going through trees and landscape, other times through each other, sometimes even Zetsu itself.

Orochimaru tries not to drool over the power on display before him. If only he had a set of those eyes. Maybe he could just get one of them from somewhere. After all Kakashi pulls off the heterochromia look very well and if he can do it so can Orochimaru.

The snake sanin ducks another fireball that the surprise Uchiha spits out and manages to add a perception seal to the edge of Zetsu's clothes.

He finds himself whisked into the strange world of cubes and gray tones before being spat out again in a most undignified manner into a tree.

With a huff the snake sage adjust his clothes back properly and makes sure he's not lost an accessory before jumping back to the battle. He's seriously thinking about tying that surprise Uchiha to a lab table if he throws him into any more trees. That's the third time this hour.

It takes half a day, nearly 30 miles of deforestation and a raging inferno that makes the Uchiha suspiciously gleeful but the creature once known as Zetsu is burned to a crisp.

“Did you have to set so much of the forest on fire?” Kakashi asks in his board tone he uses when in a male form.

“If the little monster had just burned the first time more fire wouldn't have been necessary.” the Uchiha replies.

Orochimaru looks and the miles of forest that has been scorched black fading into white ash and thinks its a bit of beautiful destruction. Not that he'll say it around Kakashi of course, the man is truly a tree lover at heart and one must learn to respect a friends interests.

Or that's what the self help book from Kabuto said anyway.

Chapter Text

Chapter 157

Orochimaru finds himself absolutely delighted with the rest of the day.

When he'd gotten the drool covered note from Kakashi's summons he'd only been able to make out half the text and was a little unsure about why he was needed to pick out something for Itachi. But now Kakashi is back in his feminine form and the two of them meet up with the mans leaf pups to go out shopping.

The little blonde one even copies his sensei and turns into a more female version of himself just for the trip.

Though it was a bit of trial and error at the beginning when the boy turned into an adult with far to many curves. But that was quickly sorted and their group is underway.

Orochimaru is tempted only once to pluck those red red eyes out of the little Uchiha's head and really it's such an improvement over the last month that he indulges himself by buying a pair of amethyst earrings that would make the Daimyo's wife weep in envy.

Then Orochimaru goes to fulfil the task that was asked of him. Finding a gift for Itachi Uchiha.

Three stores later and Orochimaru shows young Sasuke his face in the mirror.

“The red is the perfect match for the sharingan.” the little one says and Orochimaru feels a bit of pride at the compliment.

“I'm sure your big brother will like the lipstick, his hairs on the darker side then yours, but your skin tones are still the same. It'll add a pop of color and really bring out his eyes when he turns on his sharingan.”

“Thanks for your help with this Oro-san.”

“Oh it was my pleasssure little one.” he hisses with delight.

The little Uchiha the takes a small box out of his pocket.

“Here, this is for the help. Kakashi-sensei said you'd like them.” he says handing the box over.

This must be the payment that the little pug mentioned.

Orochimaru fully expects a nice accessory or two when he opens the box....and nearly drops the whole thing when he sees a pair of nice red Sharingan staring up at him.

“Oh how sssssssplinded!” he hisses in appreciation.

And to think all he had to do was start cross-dressing to get a pair of sharingan, so many years gone to waste.

Chapter Text

Chapter 158

Itachi and Kisame are on the border of rain country when the air near them swirls violently and Itachi turns on his sharingan in preparation for an attack.

Instead an overly gleeful being steps out of nothing and greets them with a smile.

“Hi I just wanted to let the two of you know that Akatsuki is done, Pain and Konan have other priorities now, I may have killed a few others members and Zetsu has been burned into nothing so you guys are free to do whatever you want. Oh and Itachi, it's gotten out about what happened with the massecare and Sasuke would like to talk to you soon.”

Is all stated by the man who is clearly a Uchiha before he vanishes just as quickly as he'd come.

Itachi blinks........WHAT?!

“Huh so Madara gave up on world takeover.” Kisame hums beside him and again WHAT?!

“Madara?” is the only thing he can ask because he's pretty sure that the man just now was not his ancestor. (Though the voice had sounded similar to the man who had helped him massecare his clan, only this man was significantly more cheerful)

“I don't know his actual name but that's the one he told me when we first meet.”

“hn.” is the only thing he can follow that up with.

Because now Danzo is dead, Hiruzen is retired, the new Hokage knows about the massecare and.....his little brother wants to see him. HIM?!

Itachi is going to have to think on this.

…......

Obito pops out of kamui in the land of hot springs, intent on a relaxing vacation now that the world has been saved.

He takes a page out of Kakashi's book and decides that a transformation is necessary. Although he doesn't go for anything as eye-catching as his former team mate, instead he settles for a nice normal looking human with average features. All the better to blend in.

“I guess it's time to figure out what i'm gonna do with my life huh Rin?”